UC-NRLF 
 
 SB Eb7 201 
 
 mm 
 
 
 m 
 
 mmm 
 
 'VfcflllM.2 L> i. 5 > ! /-A 
 
 J-\^-:<>.AV?A?.S-VV, 
 
 s$M!MJ$i 
 
I BERKELEY 
 MKPARY 
 
 ikVERSITY OP 
 
 1 The Mllflfririp; Works, hitherto published by Mr James 
 
 Gordon, are now Published by OLIVEE & BOYD, 
 Edinburgh ; Simpkin, Marshall, & Co,, London, 
 
 %* A specimen copy of any Book will be, sent POST-FREE on receipt of the 
 retail price in postage stamps. 
 
 EXHIBITION MEDAL. 
 
 A Prize Medal was awarded to Mr GORDON by the Jurors 
 of the International Exhibition of 1862, "far the merit of his 
 impor'an" Educational Works." 
 
 POETICAL READING BOOK, with Aids for Gram- 
 matical Analysis, Paraphrase, and Criticism; and an Appendix on 
 English Versification. By J. D. MORELL, A.M., LL.D., Author 
 of Grammar of the English Language, etc., and W. IHNE, Ph.D. 
 Second Edition. 2s. 6d. Containing 
 
 THE DESERTED VILLAGE. 
 THE TASK (Book I.) 
 PARADISE LosT(Books I.& V.) 
 
 THE MERCHANT OF VENICE. 
 THK PRISONER OF CHILLON. 
 THE FIELD OF WATERLOO. 
 
 MISCELLANEOUS SELECTIONS. 
 SCHOOL GEOGRAPHY. By JAMES CLYDE, LL.D., one of 
 
 the Classical Masters of the Edinburgh Acndemy. With special 
 Chapters on Mathematical and Physical Geography, and Techno- 
 logical Appendix. Seventh Edition. 4s. 
 
 " We have been struck with the ability and value of this work, 
 which is a great advance upon previous Geographic Manuals. . . 
 Almost for the first time, we have here met with a School Geog- 
 raphy that is quite a readable book, one that, being intended 
 for advanced pupils, is well adapted to make them study the subject 
 
 with a degree of interest they have never yet felt in it 
 
 Students preparing for the recently instituted University and Civil 
 Service examinations will find this their best guide." Athenaeum. 
 
 DR CLYDE'S ELEMENTARY GEOGRAPHY. Eighth 
 
 Edition. ls..6<L^f'' 
 
 %* In the Elementary Geography (intended for less advanced 
 Pupils), it has been efideavoured to reproduce that life-like group- 
 ing of facts geographical portraiture, as it may be called which 
 has been remarked with approbation in the School Geography. 
 
 GEOGRAPHY OF THE BRITISH EMPIRE. By 
 
 WM. LAWSON, Training College, Durham. 2d Edition, Revised. 3s. 
 PART I. Outlines of Mathematical and Physical Geography. 
 II. Physical, Political, and Commercial Geography of the British 
 Islands. III. Physical, Political, and Commercial Geography of 
 the British Colonies. 
 
 BOOKKEEPING, for the Class-Room and Counting- 
 HOUSE, by DOUBLE and SINGLE ENTRY, with Appendix on Com- 
 mercial Forms. By JOHN MACLEAN, Edinburgh Academy, and 
 Church of Scotland Training College. Fourth Edition. 2s. 6d. 
 KEY, 4s. Ruled Books, 2s. 6d. per Set. 
 

 Mr Gordon's Books, now issued by Oliver 
 CORKRAN'S CONCISE HISTORY OF ENGLAND IN 
 
 EPOCHS. With Maps and Genealogical and Chronological Tables. 
 Fourth Edition. 2s. 6d. 
 
 *** A very full CHRONOLOGICAL TABLE has been added to this 
 work, which forms also a TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 ENGLISH COMPOSITION for the Use of Schools. By 
 
 ROBERT ARMSTRONG, Madras College, St Andrews; and THOMAS 
 ARMSTRONG, Heriot Foundation School, Edinburgh. Part I. Four- 
 teenth Edition. Is. 6d. Part II. Fifth Edition. 2s. Both Parts 
 in one, 3s. KEY, 2s. 
 
 ARMSTRONG'S ENGLISH ETYMOLOGY for the Use 
 
 of Schools. 2s. 
 
 ARMSTRONG'S ENGLISH ETYMOLOGY for JUNIOR 
 
 CLASSES. 4d. 
 
 ENGLISH COMPOSITION IN PROSE AND VERSE, 
 
 brtsed on GRAMMATICAL SYNTHESIS. By W. SCOTT DALOLEISH, 
 M.A., Vice-Principal of Grange House School, Edinburgh. Second 
 Edition. 2s. 6d. KEY, 2s. 6d. 
 
 " The treatise is evidently, for the purposes of elementary in- 
 struction, at once the most practical and the most scientific expo- 
 sition that we have yet had." Professor Craik 
 
 " Full of clear explanation, well chosen examples, and serviceable 
 hints and directions.'' Athenaeum. 
 
 "The most rational and useful looking book on the subject that 
 we have seen." The Header. 
 
 WORDSWORTH'S EXCURSION. Book I. The Wan- 
 derer. With Notes to aid in Analysis and Paraphrasing. By Rev. 
 H. G. RORINSON, Canon of York, Principal of the Diocesan Training 
 College, York. 8d. 
 
 SCHOOL SONGS. By T. M. HUNTER, Director to the 
 
 Association for the Revival of Sacred Mtasic in Scotland. With 
 Preface by James Currie, M.A.. Principal oj.the Church of Scotland 
 Training College, Edinburgh, and Authof of "the Elements of 
 Musical Analysis," etc. 
 PART I. SCHOOL SONGS FOR JUNIOR CLASSES, containing 60 Songs, 
 
 principally set for two voices. 4d. 
 PART II. SCHOOL SONGS FOR ADVANCED CLASSES, containing 44 
 
 Songs, principally set for three voices. 6d. 
 
 HUNTER'S ELEMENTS OF VOCAL MUSIC on the 
 
 Original Sol-fa System. 6d. 
 
 SCHOOL PSALMODY. Containing 58 pieces, arranged 
 for three voices, 4d. 
 
 OBJECT-LESSON CARDS ON THE VEGETABLE 
 
 KINGDOM. Set of Twenty in a Box. 1, Is. 
 
 *#* The objects themselves are affixed to the Cards on which the 
 Lessons are printed, showing the uses of the Objects. 
 
GRAMMAR 
 
 ITALIAN LANGUAGE. 
 
GRAMMAR 
 
 ITALIAN LANGUAGE, 
 
 JOSEPH KA.MPINI, 
 
 Fellow of the Educational Institute of Scotland; Teacher of the Italian 
 
 Language and Literature in the Naval and Military Academy, the 
 
 Edinburgh Philosophical Institution, the Scottish Institution for 
 
 Young Ladies, the Edinburgh Institution for Languages, &c. 
 
 EDINBURGH : 
 
 OLIVER AND BOYD, TWEEDDALE COURT, 
 LONDON : SIMPKIN, MARSHALL, AND CO. 
 
 Price Two Shillings and Sixpence. 
 
A KEY TO MR RAMPINI'S ITALIAN GRAMMAR 
 
 IS PUBLISHED, PRICE 2s. 
 
 PRINTED BF OLIVER AND BOYD, EDINBURGH. 
 
TO HER GRACE 
 
 CHAELOTTE ANN, 
 of Buccletul) aub (atjeeitsbern), 
 
 &c. &c. 
 
 MAY IT PLEASE YOUR GRACE, 
 
 HAVING already experienced so much kindness and 
 consideration whilst engaged in the Instruction of Junior 
 Members of the noble Family of Buccleuch in the Italian 
 Language, I have to offer additional acknowledgments for 
 your Grace's kindness in permitting me to send forth to the 
 world, under the distinguished patronage of your name, a 
 Grammar of my native tongue written in the English Lan- 
 guage. This Work is therefore now presented with the 
 sincere and grateful respect 
 
 Of your Grace's 
 
 Faithful and obedient Servant, 
 
 J. RAMPINI. 
 EDINBURGH. March 1852. 
 
PEEFACE. 
 
 THIS Grammar has been written principally for the use of students 
 in this country who learn the Italian Language as a branch of educa- 
 tion. At the same time, those who wish to extend their knowledge 
 will be better able to do so after having made themselves thoroughly 
 acquainted with a short treatise of this kind, than if they had com- 
 menced with a more complicated work. The Author's experience 
 has convinced him that long courses of Grammar are often under- 
 taken, but seldom completed. The beginner is unable to distinguish 
 the essential parts from those which are of secondary importance and 
 may therefore be taken up with advantage at an after-period. No 
 doubt this inconvenience may be obviated to a certain extent by 
 typographical distinctions and directions, or by the judgment of the 
 teacher ; but it is better to keep what is unnecessary at first out of 
 sight. To learn a little well will enable the pupil to learn more 
 afterwards : to learn a great deal imperfectly is an impediment to all 
 future progress. In the language of Whately, " It is better to un- 
 derstand even a little, that it is possible to accomplish, than to make 
 splendid professions, which can only lead to disappointment." Early 
 Lessons on Reasoning. Much useful information may be conveyed, 
 and with little effort on the part of the pupil, by the observations of 
 an able preceptor. To render this Work a really good Hand-look, to 
 be thoroughly learned and continually referred to, all observations 
 not absolutely necessary have been omitted. Many Grammars are 
 made up of mere verbiage. The Author having observed that pupils 
 often employ technical words without understanding them, a more 
 simple mode of expression has been used, though with reluctance, 
 which may present fewer learned words, but is fitted to impart clearer 
 ideas. And here again Whately's words may be quoted : " Even in 
 the common mechanical arts, something of a technical language is 
 found needful for those who are learning or exercising them. It would 
 be a very great inconvenience, even to a common carpenter, not to 
 have a precise, well-understood name for each of the several operations 
 he performs, such as chiselling, sawing, planing, &c., and for the 
 several tools [or instruments] he works with. And if we had not 
 such words as Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication, Division, &c., 
 employed in an exactly defined sense, and also fixed rules for conduct- 
 
vin PKEFACE. 
 
 ing these and other arithmetical processes, it would be a tedious and 
 uncertain work, to go through even such simple calculations as a child 
 very soon learns to perform with perfect ease. And after all, there 
 would be a fresh difficulty in making other persons understand clearly 
 the correctness of the calculations made. 
 
 u You are to observe, however, tliat technical language and rules, if 
 you would make them really useful, must be not only distinctly under- 
 stood, but also learnt, and remembered as familiarly as the Alphabet ; 
 and employed constantly, and with scrupulous exactness. Otherwise, 
 technical language ivill prove an encumbrance instead of an advantage; 
 just as a suit of clothes would be, if, instead of putting them on and 
 wearing them, you were to carry them about in your hand." 
 
 The best way to acquire a foreign language is to compare it closely 
 with our own. The Author regrets that the brevity and simplicity, 
 which he thought of vital importance in a first book on Grammar, 
 prevented his paying sufficient attention to this. The rules them- 
 selves are very few ; and the difficulties and character of a language 
 arise from its numerous peculiarities and idiomatical expressions, 
 which cannot be reduced to general rules, but must each be studied 
 by itself. The English and Italian resemble each other in both 
 being very idiomatical. In writing an elementary Grammar, the 
 chief difficulty lies in being able judiciously to draw a line between 
 those idioms and peculiarities that should be taught at first, and such 
 as may be safely deferred. 
 
 The General Rules of Grammar have been separated from the 
 Practical Rules of the Italian, in the belief that the latter would be 
 better learned by themselves. As to the General Principles, the 
 Author has perused the principal works on the subject, and has not 
 found one, not excepting Becker, superior in fulness, precision, clear- 
 ness, and simplicity, to the Principes de Grammaire Generale, by 
 A. J. Silvestre de Sacy, the celebrated Oriental scholar ; and he is 
 persuaded that a great benefit would be conferred on teachers and 
 students were the work translated and adapted to the English lan- 
 guage. What is said on this subject has been chiefly taken from it. 
 Being unwilling to obtrude his own views, the Author has allowed 
 some definitions to remain which appear to him to be erroneous. He 
 considers the Adjective to be as important and necessary a word as 
 either the Noun or the Verb, and as different from either as they are 
 from each other. In the infancy of Language among uncivilized 
 tribes, what first attracts notice are objects, the different qualities of 
 tfiem, and motion or action: hence arise Nouns, Adjectives, and Verbs. 
 " The stone is hard" seems a more natural expression than " the 
 stone has hardness," which supposes abstraction, and consequently 
 
PREFACE. IX 
 
 requires a considerable development of the reasoning faculty. All 
 the other words might, for the sake of simplicity, be conveniently 
 arranged under the denomination of Particles, not being sufficiently 
 important, like the other three, to require a separate classification. 
 These are, Articles, Pronouns, Prepositions, Adverbs, and Conjunc- 
 tions ; excluding the Interjection, which is a mere expression of 
 feeling. Of these words the Conjunction only seems to be absolutely 
 necessary in order to connect the other three. The place of the Pre- 
 position may be supplied by Cases. The Adverb performs the office 
 of an Adjective, and is often an Adjective : it expresses the qualities 
 of actions, as the adjective does of objects : e. g. he runs fast. Articles 
 are Adjectives ; Pronouns either Nouns or Adjectives. 
 
 What is said on Moods and Tenses is necessarily brief. To have 
 treated them more fully would have drawn too largely on the time 
 and attention of the pupil ; who, though anxious to acquire a know- 
 ledge of the Italian Language, may not be prepared to enter upon the 
 study of General Grammar. The Author's object in introducing this 
 subject at all was, to render the student as much as possible indepen- 
 dent of other books, either by imparting new information or refresh- 
 ing his memory. With the same view are given in Part II., which 
 treats of Pronunciation and the Writing of Italian, a number of Rules 
 which by some may be considered as unnecessary. Owing to a very 
 general deficiency, however, in these important branches of knowledge 
 among young students, it was not deemed advisable to exclude any- 
 thing that might tend to ensure accuracy. The Rules for Pronun- 
 ciation have been minutely given, after a comparison of the English 
 with the Italian sounds, and the explanations of Dr Latham, in his 
 Elements of English Grammar, have been closely followed. 
 
 Part III., extending to 59 pages, contains the Practical Rules of 
 the language. It should be read attentively, and any difficulties that 
 occur should be marked, and an explanation requested from the 
 teacher. It will be of advantage to commit the more important of 
 the Rules to memory ; and the student should constantly refer to this 
 Part, both in reading and writing. Such an ever-recurring reference 
 will have the effect of familiarizing him with the Rules. But a more 
 effective method is to learn through examples. Every rule should be 
 preceded by an example, and every example expressed in colloquial 
 language. The examples, which would be the student's Phrase Book, 
 should not only be learnt thoroughly, but repeated very frequently 
 and systematically. A few minutes bestowed regularly at a fixed 
 time every day on the repetition of such phrases, would greatly facil- 
 itate the acquisition of the language. When he afterwards learns a 
 rule, he will readily be able to give the example which refers to it ; 
 
X PREFACE. 
 
 also to remember it easily, and apply it. For example : the Italian 
 for "give me your hand," is "datemi la mano." The student who 
 has systematically repeated this short and easy phrase, with many 
 others, will have no greater difficulty in saying to an Italian "datemi 
 la mano," than in saying to an Englishman "give me your hand." 
 When he takes up his Grammar, he learns that 
 
 1. To give is translated by dare. 
 
 2. The second person plural of the present indicative of the verbs 
 in are, has ate for its termination (d-afe-mi). 
 
 3. Tome or me is translated by mi. 
 
 4. Mi is affixed to a verb in the imperative. 
 
 5. The definite article for the feminine is la. 
 
 6. Mano (hand) is the only noun ending in o which is feminine. 
 
 7. The possessive pronoun is seldom used in Italian when the clear- 
 ness of the sense renders it unnecessary. 
 
 After a pupil is familiar with an example, he cannot have any diffi- 
 culty in remembering the rules connected with it. It is important 
 that the same example (or examples) should always be given for the 
 same rule. When he afterwards translates from Italian into English, 
 or, which is much better,* from English into Italian, he should be made 
 to prove the correctness of what he speaks or writes. Supposing 
 that he has to translate "show me your hand," if he has seen in some 
 phrase that to show is mostrare, he would say mostratemi la mano, 
 giving as a proof " datemi la mano," and the phrase in which mostrare 
 is found. He could make no mistake, as he has only correct proofs to 
 give ; he could not say il mano, as he had no example for it. A strict 
 adherence to this system from the beginning would soon prove that 
 it was not more difficult, while it is far more efficient, than others 
 usually pursued. The necessity of proving ensures accuracy the 
 repetition, facility the constant comparison of what is new with 
 what has been previously learnt, a habit of thinking. 
 
 As almost every master has his own peculiar views in teaching, and 
 as the present Work is intended to be one of general use, and not to 
 suit any particular system, it has been thought unnecessary to increase 
 its size by the addition of such phrases ; but the Author contemplates 
 their publication in such a form as will admit of their being bound 
 along with the Grammar. 
 
 Part IV. containing the Verbs, and Part V. the Exercises, are 
 reprinted from the Author's translation of Biagioli's Grammar. 
 
 * The first exercise enables him to understand the language ; the second 
 to understand and to use it. 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 PART I. 
 
 P*ge 
 
 GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF GRAMMAR .3 
 
 PART II. 
 
 PRONUNCIATION AND WRITING OF THE ITALIAN LANGUAGE. 
 
 Sounds 15 
 
 Vowel Sounds 16 
 
 Mute Sounds 16 
 
 Liquid Sounds 17 
 
 Compound Sounds 17 
 
 Diphthongs and Triphthongs 17 
 
 Letters 17 
 
 Observations on the Pronunciation of the Italian 18 
 
 Directions for the Pronunciation of the e and o 1.19 
 
 Accent ; 20 
 
 Quantity 21 
 
 Directions for acquiring a good Pronunciation of the Italian 21 
 
 Syllables, and the Eules for arranging them 23 
 
 Apostrophe 24 
 
 Contraction 25 
 
 Use of Capital Letters 26 
 
 Punctuation v 26 
 
 Tones .*. 26 
 
 Pauses 26 
 
 Emphasis 27 
 
 The Dash 27 
 
xii CONTENTS. 
 
 Page 
 Euphony 27 
 
 Exercises on Pronunciation Table of the most remarkable Sounds 
 
 in the Italian Language 28 
 
 List of words that have a different meaning according as their ac- 
 cented e or o is pronounced closely or openly 30 
 
 List of Words in which the z has the sound of ds 32 
 
 On the Accent 33 
 
 Exercise in Italian Poetry 34 
 
 PART III. 
 
 PRINCIPAL RULES OP THE ITALIAN LANGUAGE. 
 
 Gender 45 
 
 Number 46 
 
 Article 48 
 
 Case 50 
 
 Personal Pronouns 51 
 
 Pronominal Particles 53 
 
 Adjectives 56 
 
 Comparatives and Superlatives 58 
 
 Augmentatives and Diminutives 61 
 
 Numerals 63 
 
 Pronouns 65 
 
 General Observations on the Italian Pronouns 68 
 
 Possessive Pronouns 72 
 
 Demonstrative Pronouns 74 
 
 Indefinite Pronouns 75 
 
 Prepositions 79 
 
 Adverbs 86 
 
 Moods and Tenses 90 
 
 Regular and Irregular Tenses 94 
 
 Peculiarities in the Use of the Verbs 100 
 
 PAET IV. 
 
 ON THE ITALIAN VERBS 109 
 
 Regular Verbs Ill 
 
 Irregular Verbs 114 
 
 Defective Verbs 121 
 
 List of Verbs conjugated like Unire 123 
 
CONTENTS. Xlll 
 
 PART V. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 Page 
 
 On the Articles 133 
 
 On the Personal Pronouns 136 
 
 On, &c 138 
 
 On the Adjectives 141 
 
 On the Comparatives and Superlatives 144 
 
 On the Augmentatives and Diminutives 147 
 
 On the Numbers 149 
 
 On the Pronouns 152 
 
 On the Relative Pronouns 155 
 
 On the Possessive Pronouns 158 
 
 On the Demonstrative Pronouns 161 
 
 On the Words tutto and ogni 163 
 
 On the Prepositions 166 
 
 On the Adverbs 169 
 
 On the Conjunctions 171 
 
 On the Use of the Auxiliary Verbs 174 
 
 On the Irregular Verbs 177 
 
 On the Present Participle 180 
 
 On the Past Participle 183 
 
 On the Moods ...186 
 
 THE INTERJECTIONS 189 
 
PART I. 
 
 GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF GRAMMAR. 
 
ITALIAN G1AMMAIL 
 
 PART I. 
 
 GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF GRAMMAR. 
 
 1. LANGUAGE is the expression of our ideas, and their 
 various relations. 
 
 2. An idea expressed by words is called a PROPOSITION. 
 
 3. Every PROPOSITION is the enunciation of a judgment ; 
 as, " ink is black." 
 
 4. Every proposition has three elements or parts, called 
 the SUBJECT, the PREDICATE, and the COPULA. 
 
 5. The Subject is the person or thing which forms the 
 subject of our discourse. 
 
 6. The Predicate is the assertion made concerning any 
 subject. 
 
 7. The Copula is that part of a proposition which con- 
 nects the subject and predicate. 
 
 8. The copula is always the verb to be, which is 
 called the SUBSTANTIVE VERB. 
 
 9. If the verb to be stand by itself, the proposition is 
 called AFFIRMATIVE ; if it be accompanied by the word 
 not, it is NEGATIVE. 
 
 10. The copula and predicate may be expressed by a 
 single word. 
 
 11. All verbs, except the verb to be, express both the 
 
 A 
 
4 GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF GRAMMAR. 
 
 copula and the predicate ; as, " man lives," which is the 
 same as "man is living." 
 
 12. The Predicate is also called the Attribute. All 
 verbs that express both the copula and predicate may be 
 called ATTRIBUTIVE VERBS, to distinguish them from the 
 verb to be, which is called the substantive verb. 
 
 13. The subject is either simple or compound. 
 
 14. The simple subject indicates but one thing; as, 
 "ink" in the proposition, "ink is black." 
 
 15. The compound subject indicates several things, the 
 nature of which is determined by ideas independent of 
 each other ; as, " peaches and apricots are good." 
 
 16. The simple subject is either complex or incomplex. 
 
 17. The simple incomplex subject indicates a thing, the 
 nature of which is determined by a single idea; as, " ink 
 is black." 
 
 18. The simple complex subject indicates a thing, the 
 nature of which is determined by several ideas ; as, 
 "peaches, which are ripe, are excellent." 
 
 19. The predicate is divided like the subject into simple 
 and compound, and the simple predicate into complex and 
 incomplex. 
 
 20. NOUNS are words which express persons or things in 
 a determinate manner by recalling the idea of their nature. 
 
 21. Nouns are either proper, common, or abstract. 
 
 22. Proper nouns designate persons and things in such 
 a manner that the designation is only applicable to one 
 individual, person, or thing. 
 
 23. Common nouns designate persons and things in 
 manner common to all individuals of the same species. 
 
 24. Abstract nouns express a manner of existence 
 abstracted as it were from the person or things to which 
 it belongs ; as, " virtue, goodness." 
 
GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF GRAMMAR. 5 
 
 25. The number of particular ideas comprehended in 
 a common or abstract noun forms the comprehension of 
 the noun. 
 
 26. The number of individuals or classes comprehended 
 in the signification of a common or abstract noun forms 
 the extension of the noun. 
 
 27. The greater the comprehension of a noun the 
 smaller is its extension. 
 
 28. ARTICLES are words which serve to determine the 
 extension of nouns. 
 
 29. A PRONOUN is a word used instead of a noun. 
 
 30. The person that speaks is called the First Person ; 
 the person spoken to, the Second Person ; and the person 
 spoken of, the Third Person. There are different pro- 
 nouns for each of these persons. 
 
 31. An ADJECTIVE is a word added to a noun to ex- 
 press a quality of it. 
 
 32. Adjectives may be divided into two classes accord- 
 ing as they express either a quality or a circumstance ; 
 as, "a good book, every book." 
 
 33. Numerals are properly adjectives which express a 
 circumstance. 
 
 34. We are often obliged to join several words to 
 express completely the idea of the thing of which we 
 speak. Such words are said to be related or connected 
 together. 
 
 35. The relation or connexion between words may be 
 indicated in three different ways ; 1st, By the position 
 of the words ; 2d, By a change in their terminations ; 
 3d, By a separate word placed between the words con- 
 nected together. This word is called a PREPOSITION. 
 
 36. Sometimes the natural position of words being 
 changed, the sense alone enables us to distinguish their 
 
b GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF GRAMMAR. 
 
 proper meaning. In Italian such inversions are very 
 common. 
 
 37. ADVERBS are words which unite the meaning of a 
 preposition and a noun. 
 
 38. Adverbs serve to express the circumstances which 
 accompany an action ; such as, time, place, manner. 
 
 39. As several words are connected together in a pro- 
 position, so various propositions have relations with each 
 other that require to be expressed. 
 
 40. CONJUNCTIONS are words that connect propositions 
 and words together. 
 
 41. INTERJECTIONS are cries of pain, joy, wonder, &c., 
 and which escape us at the moment of sudden excitement. 
 
 42. Words are often used in different ways ; thus, an 
 adjective is often used as a noun, or an adverb ; a pre- 
 position as a conjunction, &c. 
 
 43. There are also words which it is not always easy 
 to say to what class they belong ; yes, no, not, are among 
 such words. 
 
 44. Two or three words are often joined together so 
 as to form but one word. 
 
 45. Words may also belong at the same time to two 
 different classes ; who^ for example, seems to be partly an 
 adjective and partly a conjunction. Such words might 
 be called with propriety Conjunctive Adjectives. They 
 generally go under the name of Relative pronouns. 
 
 46. Possessive pronouns are adjectives. 
 
 47. Demonstrative pronouns are articles. 
 
 48. What are called Distributive pronouns are adjectives. 
 
 49. The Indefinite pronouns are nouns. 
 
 50. As the introduction of new technical terms is not 
 desirable, it is the more important that the true nature of 
 words should be understood. 
 
GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF GRAMMAR. 7 
 
 51. "Words are divided into two classes according as 
 they undergo a change in their form or termination or 
 do not. Nouns, adjectives, pronouns, articles, and verbs 
 belong to the first class, namely, that which undergoes 
 modification. Conjunctions, prepositions, adverbs, and 
 interjections to the second, or that which undergoes no 
 modification. 
 
 52. In almost all languages nouns undergo a change 
 either in their form or in their termination, by which we 
 know whether the nouns are applied to one or more in- 
 dividuals. These different forms or terminations are 
 called Number. 
 
 53. The distinction of number is observed also with 
 the articles, adjectives, pronouns, and verbs. 
 
 54. All bodies in nature are divided into three classes ; 
 the first embraces all those bodies in which there is no 
 distinction of sex, as in minerals, or in which the distinc- 
 tion of sex is unnoticed, as in the Vegetable Kingdom ; 
 such bodies are called Neuter. All other bodies are divided 
 according to their sex into Masculine or Feminine. 
 
 55. In some languages, as in English, the division of 
 nouns into masculine, feminine, and neuter is correct ; in 
 others, as in Italian, it is a mere conventional division 
 founded upon the termination of the noun. Thus, Donna, 
 woman, when it takes the termination one, becomes 
 masculine. 
 
 56. Augmentatives and diminutives are terminations 
 added to nouns, and sometimes to adjectives and verbs, 
 to express an idea of smallness or large size, beauty or 
 ugliness, affection, esteem, contempt, &c. 
 
 57. A noun may be connected or related to a noun, 
 a verb, or an adjective, as stated before. The relation 
 may be determined by the position of the word, a preposi- 
 
8 GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF GRAMMAR. 
 
 tion or a change of termination, as in Latin. This change 
 is called a Case. 
 
 58. To decline a noun, an adjective, or a pronoun, is 
 to repeat all the different changes of termination of 
 which it is capable. 
 
 59. Adjectives express quality the different degrees 
 of these qualities being known only by comparison, we 
 call in grammar degrees of comparison, the various ways 
 by which these differences are marked. 
 
 60. There are commonly reckoned three degrees of 
 comparison: the Positive, the Comparative, and the 
 Superlative. 
 
 61. The positive state expresses the quality of an object 
 without any increase or diminution;; as, "good, wise, great." 
 
 62. The comparative degree increases or lessens the 
 positive in signification; as, "wiser, greater, less wise." 
 
 63. The superlative degree increases or lessens the 
 positive to the highest or lowest degree; as, "wisest, 
 greatest, least wise." 
 
 64. There is another superlative, which may be called 
 the superlative of eminence ; as, " very eloquent," to dis- 
 tinguish it from the other superlative. 
 
 65. The degrees of comparison may be determined : 
 1st, By adverbs, as more, less; 2d, By terminations, 
 as stronger ; 3d, As, in Italian, by the use of an article 
 before the adverb ; thus, piu forte, stronger ; il piu forte, 
 the strongest 
 
 66. Tenses are forms which a verb takes to indicate 
 the circumstances of time. 
 
 67. Tenses are indefinite when they express the exis- 
 tence of a subject and its relation with a predicate, 
 without indicating any time; and definite when they 
 determine a period past, present, or future. 
 
GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF GRAMMAR. 9 
 
 68. Tenses are also absolute when they indicate a re- 
 lation with the time in which we speak, and relative 
 when besides this relation they express another relation 
 with an event either past or future. 
 
 69. Past and future tenses are proximate when they 
 indicate a time near the moment in which we speak, and 
 remote when they indicate a distant time, 
 
 70. Relative tenses are either anterior, simultaneous, or 
 posterior, according as they indicate a time past, present, 
 or future, in reference to an event past or future. 
 
 71. It is very important that these different distinc- 
 tions should be well understood by the student, as it is 
 very difficult without a clear notion of them to state the 
 different rules of a particular language in regard to them. 
 
 72. Sometimes a definite tense is used to express an 
 indefinite time. " Do you like bread ?" does not mean 
 do you like bread just now; but " do you like bread at 
 all times, in general ? " The sense alone here marks the 
 distinction. 
 
 73. Tenses are therefore ; 1st, Either definite or in- 
 definite; 2d, Absolute or relative; 3d, Past, present, or 
 future; 4th, Proximate or remote; 5th, Anterior, simul- 
 taneous, or posterior. 
 
 74. Propositions may be divided into three classes 
 according as they express doubts, judgments, or desires. 
 
 75. Verbs often take different forms, by which we 
 know the nature of the propositions. These forms are 
 called Moods. 
 
 76. The principal moods in every language are, the 
 Indicative, Imperative, and Subjunctive. 
 
 77. Different moods often adopt the same form ; thus, 
 the Subjunctive in English signifies doubt, condition, 
 motive, wish, apprehension, and supposition. 
 
10 GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF GRAMMAR. 
 
 78. All verbs, except the substantive verb, express 
 either an action or a quality. 
 
 79. Verbs are of three kinds : Active, Passive, and Neuter. 
 
 80. When the action expressed by the verb is done 
 by the subject, the verb is said to be active. 
 
 81. When the action expressed by the verb is suffered 
 by the subject ; as, " I am loved/' the verb is said to 
 be passive. 
 
 82. The neuter verbs express a quality, or a state of 
 being ; as, "I stay, I sit." 
 
 83. The Voice of the verb is that particular form which 
 the verb takes sometimes to indicate whether the verb is 
 active, passive, or neuter.* 
 
 84. The passive verbs are not necessary. They serve, 
 however, 1st, To avoid the expression of the subject 
 when it is not known, or we prefer not to mention it ; 
 2d, Even when the subject is used, it lays the stress and 
 fixes the attention upon the object; 3d, It introduces 
 variety in the discourse. 
 
 85. The union of all the forms which a verb can take 
 to indicate the voices, tenses, moods, numbers, and 
 persons, is called Conjugation ; and to repeat all these 
 forms is to conjugate a verb. 
 
 86. Verbs are divided into transitive and intransitive. 
 
 87. Transitive verbs are those which are or may be 
 joined to an accusative ; as, " I read a book." 
 
 88. Intrans itive verbs are those which are never joined 
 to an accusative.-}- 
 
 * Though neuter verbs have no distinctive voice, they might 
 have it. 
 
 j* The beginner will avoid every difficulty in distinguishing tran- 
 sitive from intransitive verbs, by considering whether the two 
 accusatives, " some person " or " some thing," may be joined to a verb. 
 If they do, the verb is transitive; if they do not, it is intransitive. 
 
GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF GRAMMAR. 11 
 
 89. Reflective verbs express an action done by the 
 subject upon itself; as, " You deceive yourself." 
 
 90. Impersonal verbs are those which are only used 
 in the third person. 
 
 91. Defective verbs are used only in certain tenses 
 and persons. 
 
 92. Verbs are regular when they follow a general 
 standard irregular when they deviate from it. 
 
PART II. 
 
 PRONUNCIATION AND WHITING OF THE 
 ITALIAN LANGUAGE. 
 
PAET II. 
 
 PRONUNCIATION AND WRITING OF THE 
 ITALIAN LANGUAGE. 
 
 SOUNDS. 
 
 1. The elementary Sounds of the Italian language 
 are twenty- seven ; of these twenty-one are single, and 
 six compound. 
 
 2. The simple elementary sounds are as follows : 
 
 1. The sound of the letter a in padre, father. 
 
 2. e in mele, apples. 
 
 3. e in mele* honey. 
 
 4. i in cibo, food. 
 6. o in voto, vow 
 
 6. o in v6to 9 empty. 
 
 7. u in prudenza, prudence. 
 These seven sounds are vowel sounds. (In English the 
 
 vowel sounds are twelve.) 
 
 8. The sound of the letter p in pane, bread. 
 
 9. b in bocca, mouth. 
 
 10. /in fame, hunger. 
 
 11. v in vino, wine. 
 
 12. t in terra, earth. 
 
 13. d in duro, hard. 
 
 * The circumflex accent is not used in Italian. It is adopted oc- 
 casionally in this Grammar to mark the open sound of the e and o, 
 to assist the pupil. 
 
16 SOUNDS. 
 
 14. The sound of the letter c in cuore, heart. 
 
 15. g in gomito, elbow. 
 
 16. s in sonno, sleep. 
 
 17. s in rosa, rose. 
 These ten sounds are called mute sounds. 
 
 18. The sound of the letter / in lingua. 
 
 19. m in muro, wall. 
 
 20. n in naso, nose. 
 
 21. r in rete, net. 
 These four sounds are called liquid sounds. 
 
 22. The sound of the letters see, sci, in scena, scene ; sciu- 
 
 gatojo, towel. 
 
 23. gli in giglio, lily. 
 
 24. #n in cigna, strap. 
 
 25. c in cena, supper ; cima, summit. 
 
 26. g in gemma, gem ; ginocchio, knee. 
 
 27. # in zucchero, sugar. 
 
 These last six sounds are called compound sounds. The 
 first three can only he represented by joining two conso- 
 nants. The c seems to combine the sound of t, and g of d 
 with another sound which could not be expressed by itself. 
 The sound of % in zucchero is a combination of t and s ; 
 and in mezzo, of d and s. 
 
 3. Sounds of the Italian language as they are found 
 in English words. 
 
 VOWEL SOUNDS. 
 
 1. a as in father. 5. o close, as in no. 
 
 2. e close, as in paint. 6. o open, as in not. 
 
 3. e open, as in met. 7. u as in prudence. 
 
 4. i as in fee. 
 
 MUTE SOUNDS. 
 
 1. js as in pain. 6. d as in dart. 
 
 2. 6 as in bone. 7. c as in cant. 
 
 3. /as in/ee. 8. g as in #0. 
 
 4. v as in voice. 9. s as the first in season. 
 
 5. 2 as in tone. 10. 5 as the second in season. 
 
LETTERS. 17 
 
 LIQUID SOUNDS. 
 
 1. I in lent. 3. n in nose. 
 
 2. m in mouth. 4. r in rent. 
 
 COMPOUND SOUNDS. 
 
 1. see as sh in shame. 6. ci as ch in cheese. 
 
 2. sci as $/t in $Ae. 7. ge as # in #ew. 
 
 3. gli as # in brilliant. 8. </i as # in gin. 
 
 4. (jrn as first n in onion. 9. # as to in Switzerland. 
 
 5. ce as c& in chain. 10. # as ete in Windsor. 
 
 DIPHTHONGS AND TRIPHTHONGS. 
 
 4. A Diphthong is a compound sound formed by 
 uniting two vowels together ; such as piano (floor). 
 
 5. There are also Triphthongs, or three vowels pro- 
 nounced by a single impulse of the voice ; as miei (my). 
 
 LETTERS. 
 
 6. Sounds are capable of being expressed in writing 
 by signs. These signs are seen by the eye, whilst sounds 
 are heard by the ear. 
 
 1. Figures, like , c, /, &c., .which represent sounds, 
 are called letters. 
 
 8. The figures of the letters are as follows : 
 
 Five vowels a, e, i, o, u. 
 
 Nine mutes p 9 b, f, v, t, d, c, g, s. 
 
 One silent h. 
 
 Four liquid /, m, n, r. 
 
 Two compound, or letters having a double sound j and z* 
 
 The letter q is called by some Italian grammarians half 
 a letter (mezza lettera), as it can only be pronounced with 
 the letter u. Its sound is the same as in English ; as, 
 qualitcL, quality ; questions, question ; requisite, requisite ; 
 quoziente, quotient. 
 
 * The c and g being pronounced either as mutes or compound 
 consonants, have been placed among the mutes only. J"is the same 
 as ii ; thus we may write tempj or tempii, temples. At the begin- 
 ning of a word and when between vowels it is the same as . 
 
18 PKONUNCIATION. 
 
 9. The number of the letters is twenty-two. 
 
 10. The order of the letters is as follows : 
 
 a, b, c, d, e, /, g, h, i, j, /, m, n, o, p, q, r, s, t, u, v, z. 
 
 11. The order of the letters is called the Alphabet, 
 because in the Greek language the names of the two first 
 letters were alpha and beta respectively ; that is, alpha 
 was the name of the letter which we call a, and beta of b. 
 
 12. The names of the letters are as follow : 
 
 a, bi, ci, di, e, effe, gi, acca, i, i lungo, elle, emme, enne, 
 o, pi, cu } erre, esse, ti, u, vi, tseta or dseta* 
 
 OBSERVATIONS ON THE PKONUNCIATION OF THE ITALIAN. 
 
 13. The spelling of the Italian follows exactly the 
 pronunciation, with very few exceptions. It does not 
 do so in the majority of English words. 
 
 14. Every letter is pronounced except A, which is used 
 as a sign in writing in the three following cases. 
 
 15. (I.) The h is used in ZTo, I have ; Hai, Thou 
 hast ; Ha, He has ; Hanno, They have ; to distinguish 
 (in writing only) these words from o, or ; ai } to thee ; 
 a, to ; annO) year. 
 
 16. (II.) It is used after c and g when e or i follow, 
 to give to these letters a hard sound, which otherwise 
 would be soft. (See section 18.) 
 
 17. (III.) The h is used after the vowels in interjections, 
 as ah ! eh I ih I oh ! uh ! to prolong and sustain the sound 
 of the vowel. 
 
 18. The consonants c (ch) and g are always pronounced 
 hard, except when followed by e or i. Remember ceci, 
 chick-pease ; gengive, the gums. 
 
 * The % is not only a compound, but also a double letter like e 
 and o ; that is, it represents two different sounds ; it has therefore 
 two different names. The same might be said of e and o. 
 
PRONUNCIATION. 19 
 
 19. The syllables see and sci are pronounced as sh in 
 shame and she. Hem. scelta, choice ; scienza, science. 
 
 20. The syllable gli is pronounced as the II in brilliant, 
 except in negligente, negligent, and Anglia^ a poetical word 
 for Inghilterra, England. 
 
 21. The two letters gn are pronounced somewhat like 
 the first n in the word onion (cipolla). 
 
 22. The consonant s between two vowels is pronounced 
 as the second s in season (stagione), and like the first s 
 in all other cases.* 
 
 23. When a word beginning with an s, followed by a 
 vowel, is joined to a word ending with a vowel, the sound 
 of the s is not changed. 
 
 24. The consonant z is generally pronounced like to. 
 
 25. The two vowels e and o are sometimes pronounced 
 open and sometimes close. In the greater number of 
 cases, no certain rule can be given to determine the pro- 
 nunciation of these letters. The Italians themselves do 
 not always agree on this point. The following directions 
 should, however, be attended to. 
 
 DIRECTIONS FOR THE PRONUNCIATION OF THE 6 AND 0. 
 
 26. (I.) The difference between the two vowels is only 
 marked distinctly on the accented vowels. 
 
 27. (II.) An accented o at the end of a word is always 
 open. 
 
 28. (III.) o preceded by u is always open. 
 
 29. (IV.) The Pupil should notice the pronunciation 
 
 * The s is pronounced like the second s in season before b, d, r, v ; 
 as, sbiadato, faded ; sdentato, toothless ; sregolato, unruly ; svista, 
 oversight. In cosa, thing, and cosi, thus, the s is like the first s in 
 season. 
 
20 ACCENT. 
 
 of the common termination of words ; thus, if ore in dolore 
 (pain) is close, it will be close also in furore (fury), sa- 
 por e (taste). 
 
 30. (V.) As the close sound is perhaps more common 
 than the open, it will be safer for the Pupil to use it in 
 preference in all doubtful words. 
 
 ACCENT. 
 
 31. In pronouncing a word formed of many syllables, 
 the voice is heard more distinctly upon one than on the 
 other. This raising of the voice is called an Accent. The 
 mark ( x ) that indicates it is called accent also. It is 
 only used, however, when the accented vowel is the last 
 letter of a word. 
 
 32. The accent is generally placed on the last syllable 
 but one. It is also found 
 
 1. On the last syllable. 
 
 2. On the last syllable but two. 
 
 3. On the last syllable but three. 
 
 33. Words having the accent on the last syllable but 
 one are called parole piane, smooth or regular ; words 
 having their accent on the last syllable are called tronche^ 
 broken, or having the final syllable cut off ; and, lastly, 
 words having the accent either on the last syllable but 
 two, or on the last syllable but three, are called sdruc- 
 ciole (sliding), and bisdrucciole* 
 
 * The Italians, being accustomed to end all their words with an 
 unaccented vowel, consider all those having at the end an accented 
 vowel as having their last vowel cut off. Poetical lines ending 
 with such a word have always a syllable less than the others. 
 
21 
 
 QUANTITY. 
 
 34. Quantity is the measure of time in pronouncing 
 a syllable. A syllable is considered as long or short. 
 
 35. In Italian, accented vowels are long, and all others 
 short. 
 
 36. A long syllable generally requires double the time 
 of a short one in pronouncing. 
 
 DIRECTIONS FOR ACQUIRING A GOOD PRONUNCIATION OF 
 THE ITALIAN. 
 
 37. The difficulty in an Englishman's acquiring a good 
 Italian pronunciation does not consist in his learning new 
 sounds, for all Italian sounds are found in the English 
 language, except perhaps the sounds gli in egli, and gn 
 in signorej but in his having to pronounce the Italian 
 sounds in a different manner from what he is accustomed 
 to do in his own language. 
 
 38. The final letter of a syllable is naturally pronounced 
 more strongly than the others. In Italian it is generally 
 a vowel;* in English a consonant. The English will there- 
 fore find it difficult to mark well the sound of the vowel, 
 not being accustomed to do so. 
 
 39. As noticed above (32), the Italians place their 
 accent generally on the last syllable but one ; the English 
 generally on the last syllable, and principally on account 
 of their numerous monosyllables. The latter will there- 
 fore naturally, unless they pay great attention, or have 
 heard or spoken Italian for a considerable time, place the 
 accent on the last syllable. 
 
 * The words that end with a consonant are : in, in ; con, with ; 
 per, for ; */, the ; sur, upon ; un, a. All others end with a vowel. 
 
 B 
 
22 SYLLABLES, 
 
 40. The Italians have only one sound for the letter a 7 
 as in father (padre). The English have four : 1. The 
 long, as in pale (pallido) ; 2. The short, as in fat (grasso) 
 3. The middle, as in arm (braccio) ; 4. The broad, as in 
 all (tutto). It is not difficult to avoid the first or long, 
 and the fourth or broad sound ; but the second or short 
 sound, as in. fat, is very frequently given to the Italian a 
 in all syllables in which such a sound would be heard in 
 English r as/aMo (fact), mat-to (mad), cat-two (bad), &c. 
 
 41. The Italian language has only seven vowel sounds, 
 the English twelve the transition from the a to the u is 
 less marked therefore in the latter. The student should 
 be very careful to pronounce well the e and the i r so as 
 not to confound the two sounds. 
 
 42. When two or more words are read together, which 
 is very frequently the case, the pronunciation is exactly 
 the same as when reading one word, and the accent is 
 then heard only on the last. Conjunctions and preposi- 
 tions are generally read with the words that follow ;, 
 articles and adjectives with their nouns, adverbs with 
 their verbs, &c. 
 
 43. All vowels may be said to have three sounds, ac- 
 cording to the manner in which they are pronounced : 
 
 1. The principal or common sound, as a in amico (friend) ; 
 
 2. A prolonged sound when h follows the vowels, as in the 
 interjections ah! eh ! oh! 3. A forcible sound, as in dalla 
 (from the), bella (beautiful), stella (star). This sound is 
 heard when the vowel is followed by a double consonant, 
 and when a monosyllable ending with a vowel or a word 
 ending with an accent is followed by a consonant, and the 
 two words are pronounced together, as Dite questo a me f 
 (Do you say this to me ?) pronounce a me as amme. 
 
 44. It may be noticed also, that e and o have three 
 
SYLLABLES. 23 
 
 different sounds of their own, being pronounced either 
 close or open (see section 25) when accented, and having 
 a middle sound when not. 
 
 SYLLABLES, AND THE RULES FOR ARRANGING THEM. 
 
 45. The elementary sounds, in their smallest com- 
 bination, produce a syllable ; syllables properly combined 
 produce a word. 
 
 46. A syllable is a sound, either simple or compounded, 
 pronounced by a single impulse of the voice, and con- 
 stituting a word or part of a word, as a (to), a-mi-co 
 (friend). 
 
 47. Spelling is the art of rightly dividing words into 
 their syllables, or of expressing a word by its proper let- 
 ters. The following are the general rules for the division 
 of words into syllables. 
 
 48. (I.) A single consonant between two vowels must 
 be joined to the latter syllable, as^o-re (flower). 
 
 49. (II.) Two or three consonants proper to begin a 
 word must not be separated, as co-sta-re (to cost), di- 
 strug-gere (to destroy). 
 
 50. (III.) When two or more consonants which are 
 not proper to begin a word meet between two vowels, 
 such of them as can begin a word belong to the latter, 
 the rest to the former syllable, as com-ple-to (complete), 
 tut-to (all). 
 
 51. (IV.) Two vowels not being a diphthong must be 
 divided into separate syllables, as Di-o (God). 
 
 52. We may mention here, that a line should never 
 end with a word contracted, as gran for grande (great), 
 or having an apostrophe, as delV (of the). 
 
24 
 
 APOSTROPHE. 
 
 53. The Apostrophe shows that a vowel is cut off 
 either at the end or at the beginning of a word. 
 
 54. The two vowels i and u seldom suffer elision before 
 a word beginning with a vowel. 
 
 55. When the apostrophe is found at the end of a 
 word, before a consonant at the beginning of the next 
 word, it always stands for the vowel i. 
 
 56. Words which terminate in ce, ci, ge, and gi, suffer 
 elision only before the vowels e and /, to preserve the soft 
 sound of these syllables. 
 
 57. Gli is elided only when followed by z, otherwise 
 it would lose its natural sound, and be pronounced hard. 
 
 58. If il be preceded by a vowel, we may drop the , 
 as tutto 'I mondo for tutto il mondo (all the world). 
 
 59. No accented vowels suffer elision, because the ac^ 
 cent supposes the elision already made. 
 
 60. Elisions, though frequent in poetry, should rather 
 be avoided in prose. They represent a rapid manner of 
 pronunciation, by which words are joined together, and 
 they should be used only where the connexion between 
 words is close, as that of the article lo with its noun 
 in I'amore (the love), &c. 
 
 61. Obscurity should always be avoided if possible. 
 The elision consequently does not take place in the plural 
 articles, to distinguish them from the .singular. We write 
 and pronounce Tanima (the soul) in the singular, and le 
 anime (the souls) in the plural. 
 
25 
 
 CONTRACTION. 
 
 62. By Contraction is meant the suppression of a vowel 
 or syllable at the end of a word, followed by another be- 
 ginning with a consonant. 
 
 63. All words ending in e or 0, after 7, m, w, r, may 
 drop the final vowel before a word beginning with a single 
 consonant. Thus vuol for vuole, he wishes ; siam for siamo, 
 we are ; the adjectives chiaro (clear), raro (rare), nero 
 (black), oscuro (obscure), and a few others, being excepted. 
 
 64. When two words come together, the latter begin- 
 ning with s followed by a consonant, the contraction 
 very rarely takes place. Thus we must write, uomo stu- 
 pido, sono stupefatto, and not uom stupido, &c. 
 
 65. The adverb or a and its compounds are the only 
 words ending in a that admit of contraction. 
 
 66. The final syllable of the adjectives santo, grande, 
 quetto, bello, &c., may be dropped, unless the succeeding 
 word begin with s and another consonant. In the plural 
 we may drop the ZZ, and write either lei or be', quei or 
 gue', as the harmony of the sentence may require. Be- 
 fore words beginning with a vowel, or s and another con- 
 sonant, we should write quegli, begli. These rules do 
 not apply if the adjective be placed after the noun it 
 qualifies. 
 
 67. The following are a few of the words which un- 
 dergo the greatest alteration : vo 1 for voglio, I wish ; me 1 
 for mezzo, middle, or for meglio, better ; e 1 for eglij he; ma' 
 for mail, bad ; qua' for quali, which ; re' for rege, king ; 
 te* for tieni) take hold ; amaro, amar, for amdrano, &c. 
 
26 
 
 USE OF CAPITAL LETTERS. 
 
 68. It is proper to begin with a capital 
 
 1. The first word of every book, chapter, letter, note, 
 or any other piece of writing. 
 
 2. The first word after a period ; and if the two sen- 
 tences are totally independent, after a note of interrogation 
 or exclamation. 
 
 3. The appellations of the Deity. 
 
 4. Proper names. 
 
 5. Adjectives derived from proper nouns if used as 
 nouns ; as, the French, I Francesi. 
 
 6. Other words may begin with capitals when they 
 are remarkably emphatical. 
 
 PUNCTUATION. 
 
 69. Punctuation is the art of dividing a written compo- 
 sition into sentences, or parts of sentences, by points or 
 stops, for the purpose of marking the different pauses 
 which the sense and an accurate pronunciation require. 
 
 70. The comma represents the shortest pause ; the semi- 
 colon, a pause double that of the comma ; the colon, 
 double that of the semicolon : and the period, double that 
 of the colon. 
 
 i TONES. 
 
 71. Tones differ both from emphasis and pauses; con- 
 sisting in the modulation of the voice, the notes or 
 variations of sound which we employ in the expression of 
 our sentiments. 
 
 PAUSES. 
 
 72. Pauses or rests, in speaking and reading, are a 
 total cessation of the voice during a perceptible, and, in 
 many cases, a measurable space of time. 
 
EMPHASIS. 
 
 73. By emphasis is meant a strong and full sound, by 
 which we distinguish a word or words on which we wish 
 to lay particular stress, and to show how they affect the 
 rest of the sentence. Sometimes these words must be 
 distinguished by a particular tone of voice as well as by 
 an emphatic enunciation. 
 
 THE DASH, 
 
 74. Where a significant pause is required, a dash is 
 used in Italian as in English; but where a sentence 
 breaks off abruptly, the Italians use points of suspension ; 
 thus, .... 
 
 EUPHONY. 
 
 75. For the sake of producing a combination of letters 
 agreeable to the ear, the two following rules should be 
 observed : 
 
 1. Where a word ending with a consonant is succeeded by 
 another beginning with an s followed by a consonant,* an * 
 is prefixed to it ; as, Siamo in Iscozia (We are in Scotland). 
 Scozia, for the sake of euphony, is here changed into 
 
 2. Z> is added to the preposition a, and to the conjunc- 
 tions e and o followed by a vowel, whenever it facilitates 
 the pronunciation. 
 
 * Words beginning with $ followed by a consonant sometimes 
 take the i also at the beginning of a sentence ; thus, V Iscozia e un 
 belpaese (Scotland is a beautiful country). 
 
 f The * followed by a consonant at the beginning of words is 
 called .s wipwra* 
 
28 
 
 EXEECISES ON PBONUNCIATIOK 
 
 EXERCISE I. 
 
 TABLE OP THE MOST REMARKABLE SOUNDS IN THE ITALIAN 
 LANGUAGE. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 casa, a house. 
 coda, a tail. 
 
 c6ma,ihe hair (in poetry). 
 cura, care. 
 cena, supper. 
 Cesare, Caesar. 
 cibo, food. 
 cherubino, cherub. 
 cheppia, shad. 
 chimera, chimera. 
 ciabattino, cobbler. 
 ciecamente, blindly. 
 cielo, heaven. 
 cioccolata, chocolate. 
 ciottolo, flint. 
 ciurma, boat's crew. 
 scemo, silly. 
 scempio, simple. 
 scimunito, stupid. 
 sciagura, misfortune. 
 scioglieva, I loosed. 
 sciolto, loosed. 
 sciupare, to waste. 
 schiavo, slave. 
 schierato, arranged for 
 schiera, troop. [battle. 
 schiomare,to pluck out the 
 schioppo, gun. [hairs. 
 
 Italian Sounds. 
 
 Value in English. 
 
 00, 
 
 cart, 
 
 co close, 
 
 colon, 
 
 co open, 
 
 cot, 
 
 cu, 
 
 cuckoo, 
 
 ce close, 
 
 Chichester^ 
 
 ce open, 
 
 chest, 
 
 ci, 
 
 Chichester, 
 
 che close, 
 
 cape, 
 
 che open, 
 
 kettle, 
 
 chi, 
 
 chimerical, 
 
 cia, 
 
 charm, 
 
 cie close, 
 
 chain, 
 
 tie open, 
 
 check, 
 
 do close, 
 
 chose, 
 
 cio open, 
 
 chocolate, 
 
 ciu, 
 
 choose, 
 
 see close, 
 
 shame, 
 
 see open, 
 
 share, 
 
 sot, 
 
 she, 
 
 scia, 
 
 shard, 
 
 scio close, 
 
 shown, 
 
 scio open, 
 
 short, 
 
 sciu, 
 
 shoe, 
 
 schia, 
 
 ske-ah, 
 
 schie close, 
 
 ske-a (a in paint). 
 
 *c^^e open, 
 
 ske-e (e in met), 
 
 schio close, 
 
 ske-o (0 in no), 
 
 schio open, 
 
 ske-o ( o in not), 
 
EXERCISES ON PRONUNCIATION, 
 
 29 
 
 Italian Sounds. Value in English. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 schiu, ske-u (u in prudence), schiuma, foam. 
 
 ga, garden, 
 
 gara, strife. 
 
 ge close, regent, 
 
 generoso, generous. 
 
 ge open, jest, 
 
 genere, kind. 
 
 giy gi n ? 
 
 <jriro, turn. 
 
 ghe close, game, 
 
 ghermire, to seize. 
 
 ghe open, get, 
 
 gheppiOj kestrel. 
 
 ghi, gild, 
 
 ghiaccio, ice. 
 
 gia, jaunt, 
 
 giarda, mockery. 
 
 </zo close, joke, 
 
 giova, it is useful. 
 
 gio open, joy, 
 
 giostrcij tilting-match. 
 
 <^M, jurist, 
 
 giudice, judge. 
 
 gli, million, 
 
 egliy he. 
 
 gle open, neglect, 
 
 negletto, neglected. 
 
 gna, onion, 
 
 gnao, mewing of a cat. 
 
 gne close, do. 
 
 regnerd, he will reign. 
 
 gne open, do. 
 
 vegnente, coming (in poetry). 
 
 gni, do. 
 
 regni, kingdoms. 
 
 gno close, do. 
 
 gnomone, gnomon. 
 
 #no open, do. 
 
 gnocco, an Italian dish. 
 
 go close, go, 
 
 gold, throat. 
 
 #0 open, got, 
 
 gora, channel. 
 
 gu 9 good, 
 
 gufo y owl. 
 
 fe, yell, 
 
 jeri y yesterday. 
 
 In the following words the u should be pronounced dis- 
 tinctly, and not left out as in English : 
 
 Guardia, guard. Guerire, to cure. 
 
 Guerra (open), war. Guercio, squinting. 
 
 Guiderdone, reward (in poetry). Guastare, to spoil. 
 
 Guardare, to look. Guida, guide. 
 
30 
 
 EXERCISES ON PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 EXERCISE IT. 
 
 LIST OF WORDS THAT HAVE A DIFFERENT MEANING AC- 
 CORDING AS THEIR ACCENTED 6 OR IS PRONOUNCED 
 
 closely OR openly. 
 
 E dose. 
 Accetta, axe. 
 Affetto, I slice. 
 Bei, thou drinkest. 
 Cera, wax. 
 Colletto, hillock. 
 Corresse, that he might run. 
 Greta, chalk. 
 Dessi, themselves. 
 Desti, thou gavest. 
 Detti, dette, said. 
 E, and. 
 
 Esca, tinder, bait. 
 Fello, he did it. 
 Fero, they did. 
 Feste, you did. 
 Lega, he binds. 
 Legge, law. 
 Lessi, lesse, boiled. 
 Letto, bed. 
 Mele, apples. 
 Messe, masses. 
 Mezzo, too ripe, rotten. 
 Pera, pear. 
 Pesca, fishing. 
 Pesco, Ifish. 
 Peste, pounded. 
 Sete, thirst. 
 
 (poet.) 
 (poet.) 
 
 Temi, thou fear est. 
 
 E open. 
 
 Accetta, agreeable, he accepts. 
 Affetto, affection, I affect. 
 Bei, belli, beautiful. 
 Cera or eiera, aspect. 
 Colletto, collected. 
 Corresse, he corrected. 
 Creta, Oreta. 
 Dessi, he owes to himself. 
 Desti, thou awakest. 
 Detti, dette, /, he gave. 
 E, he is. 
 
 Esca, let him go out, &c. 
 Fello,/e/on. 
 Fero, fierce. 
 Feste, feasts. 
 Lega, a league. 
 Legge, he reads. 
 Lessi, lesse, /, he read. 
 Letto, read. 
 Mele or miele, honey. 
 Messe, harvest, reaping. 
 Mezzo, middle. 
 Pera, let him perish, &c. 
 Pesca, peach. 
 Pesco, peach tree. 
 Peste, plague. 
 Sete, you are. (poet.) 
 Tema, theme. 
 Temi, themes. 
 
EXERCISES ON PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 31 
 
 Veggia,thatlmaysee. (poet.) Veggia, cask. 
 
 Veglio, veglia, / watch, he Veglio, veglia, old. (poet.) 
 
 watches. 
 
 Vena, vene, vein, veins. Vena, vene, oats. 
 
 Venti, twenty. Venti, winds. 
 
 close. 
 
 Accorre, he runs to. 
 Accorsi; accorse, /, he ran to. 
 Apporti, to guess or impute to 
 
 thee. 
 
 Botte, tub. 
 Cola, he strains. 
 Colto, cultivated. 
 Corre, he runs. 
 Corso, run, or a course. 
 Corsi, / run. 
 
 Corti, courts. 
 
 Costa, it costs. 
 
 Fora, it pierces. 
 
 Foro, hole. 
 
 Fosse, that he might be. 
 
 Indotto, induced. 
 
 Loto, mud. 
 
 Noce, nut. 
 
 Ora, hour or now. 
 
 Orno, / adorn. 
 
 Porci, to place us. 
 
 Porsi, to place oneself. 
 
 Pose, he put. 
 
 Posi, I put. 
 
 Posta, placed. 
 
 Ricorre, he has recourse to. 
 
 Riposi, / replaced. * 
 
 Rocca, distaff. 
 
 Rodi, thou gnawest. 
 
 Rosa, gnawed. 
 
 open. 
 
 Accorre, to receive. 
 Accorsi, accorse, /, heperceived. 
 Apporti, thou bringest. 
 
 Botte, blows. 
 
 Cola, that he may honour (poet.) 
 Colto, gathered. 
 Corrc, to gather. 
 Corso, Corsican. 
 Corsi, infin., to gather for one- 
 self, Corsicans. 
 Corti, to gather for thyself. 
 Costa, coast. 
 
 Fora, it would be. (poet.) 
 Foro, bar, forum. 
 Fosse, ditches. 
 Indotto, ignorant. 
 Loto, a plant, Lotus. 
 Noce or nuoce, it hurts. 
 Or a, zephyr, he prays, (poet.) 
 Orno, the ash. 
 Porci, pigs. 
 Porsi, / handed. 
 Pose, pauses. 
 Posi, that he may rest. 
 Posta, post, station. 
 Ricorre, to gather. 
 Riposi, that he may rest. 
 Rocca, fortress. 
 Rodi, Rhodes. 
 Rosa, rose. 
 
32 
 
 EXERCISES ON PRONUNCIATION* 
 
 Rozza, rude. 
 Scola, it drains. 
 Scopo, / sweep. 
 Scorsi, / overrun. 
 Scorta, he abridges. 
 Scorti, ihou dbridgest. 
 Scorto, / abridge. 
 Sole, sun, alone. 
 Sollo, mellow. 
 Solo, sola, alone. 
 Sono, / am. 
 Sonne, I am of it. 
 Sorte, raised, risen. 
 Stolto, foolish. 
 Tocco, touch, I touch. 
 Tomo, I tumble. 
 Torre, tower. 
 Torsi, stumps or trunks. 
 
 Torta, tart. 
 Torvi, fierce. 
 Tosco, Tuscan. 
 Volgo, mob. 
 Volto, face. 
 Voto, vow. 
 
 Rozza, old horse. 
 
 Scola or scuola, school. 
 
 Scopo, aim. 
 
 Scorsi, I perceived. 
 
 Scoria, guide, perceived, he escorts. 
 
 Scorti, perceived, thou escortest. 
 
 Scorto, perceived, I escort. 
 
 Sole for suole, he uses, (poet.) 
 
 Sollo, / know it. 
 
 Solo, sola, or suolo, suola, soil, 
 
 Sono or suono, sound. [sole. 
 
 Sonne, I know of it. 
 
 Sorte, lot. 
 
 Stolto or distolto, diverted. 
 
 To ceo, morsel. 
 
 Tomo, volume. 
 
 Torre, to take. 
 
 Torsi, / twisted, or to take from 
 
 oneself. 
 
 Torta, twisted. 
 Torvi, to take from you. 
 Tosco, poison. 
 Volgo, / turn. 
 Volto, turned. 
 Voto, empty. 
 
 EXERCISE III. 
 A LIST OF WORDS IN WHICH THE Z HAS THE SOUND OF ds. 
 
 Zafferano, saffron. 
 Zajfiro, sapphire. 
 Zdino, a wallet. 
 Zanzara, a gnat. 
 Zeffiro, zephyr. 
 Zelo, zeal. 
 Zenzero, ginger. 
 Zerbino, a dandy. 
 
 Zero, a cipher, nought. 
 Zibibbo, raisins. 
 Magazzino, a warehouse. 
 Mezzo, half. 
 Azzurro, blue. 
 Gazzetta, a newspaper. 
 Bizzarro, whimsical. 
 Dozzina, dozen. 
 
EXERCISES ON PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 33 
 
 Orizonte, horizon. 
 Gazza, a magpie. 
 Rozzo, rough. 
 Battezzare, baptize. 
 
 Caratterizzare, characterize. 
 Dirozzare, to smooth. 
 Dimezzare, to halve. 
 Ldzzaro, Lazarus. 
 
 EXERCISE IV. 
 
 
 ON THE 
 
 ACCENT. 
 
 
 Parole Trouche. 
 
 Parole Piane. 
 
 Parole Sdrucciole. 
 
 Parole Bisdruc- 
 
 
 
 
 ciole. 
 
 Capita, 
 
 CapMo, 
 
 Capita, 
 
 Cdpitano, 
 
 He arrived by 
 
 Understood. 
 
 I arrive by 
 
 They arrive by 
 
 chance. 
 
 
 chance. 
 
 chance. 
 
 Perdonb, 
 
 Perdbno, 
 
 Perdono, 
 
 Dttegliclo, 
 
 He pardoned. 
 
 I pardon. 
 
 They lose. 
 
 Tell it to him. 
 
 Predicb, 
 
 Predico, 
 
 Predico, 
 
 Predicano, 
 
 He preached. 
 
 I foretell. 
 
 I preach. 
 
 They preach, 
 
 SchiavitUy 
 
 Capitdno, 
 
 Bisbetico, 
 
 Mandategliene, 
 
 Slavery. 
 
 Captain. 
 
 Whimsical. 
 
 Send him some. 
 
 Esercitb, 
 
 Esercitdre, 
 
 EserciiOj 
 
 Battetevela, 
 
 He exercised. 
 
 To exercise. 
 
 Army. 
 
 Save yourself. 
 
 Sinceritd, 
 
 Tenere, 
 
 Tenere, 
 
 Ordinano, 
 
 Sincerity. 
 
 To hold. 
 
 Tender, f. pi. 
 
 They order. 
 
 Imperocche, 
 
 Ancbra, 
 
 Ancora, 
 
 Godidmocela, 
 
 Because. 
 
 Again. 
 
 Anchor. 
 
 Let us enjoy 
 
 
 
 
 ourselves. 
 
 Gonsentiy 
 
 Consenti, 
 
 Consentono, 
 
 Intbrbidano, 
 
 He consented. 
 
 Consent. 
 
 They consent. 
 
 They trouble. 
 
 Magnanimitd, 
 
 IncrudeTire, 
 
 Fulmine, 
 
 Fuggitevme, 
 
 Magnanimity. 
 
 To become 
 
 Thunderbolt. 
 
 Fly. 
 
 
 cruel. 
 
 
 
 Cercherb, 
 
 Ingdnno, 
 
 Riscdldano, 
 
 Fulminano, 
 
 I shall seek. 
 
 Deceit. 
 
 They warm. 
 
 They dart 
 
 
 
 
 thunderbolts. 
 
 Schiaccerd, 
 
 Campdna, 
 
 Avolo, 
 
 Dttemelo, 
 
 He will crush. 
 
 Bell. 
 
 Grandfather. 
 
 Tell it to me. 
 
34 EXERCISES ON PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 EXERCISE V. 
 
 The student who wishes to acquire a good pronun- 
 ciation should commit to memory a few lines of poetry, 
 by the frequent repetition of which he will acquire more 
 facility than by the mere reading of many pages. This 
 exercise of course would be unsuitable when he has no 
 master to direct and correct him. I have selected for 
 this purpose the celebrated passage of Dante in which 
 he relates the death of Count Ugolino. The words in 
 italics are either poetical or antiquated. I have added 
 in foot-notes the words which should be used in con- 
 versation. The introduction, the literal translation, and 
 the explanatory notes, are taken from Mr Carlyle's ex- 
 cellent translation of the Inferno. 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 Count Ugolino de' Gherardeschi, was chief of the Guelphs in Pisa, 
 and Archbishop Ruggieri degli Ubaldini, of the Ghibellines. In 
 the year 1284, Pisa was the only city of Tuscany that adhered to 
 the Ghibelline party ; and Ugolino himself was of a Ghibelline fam- 
 ily, but quite unscrupulous, and eager for power. In that same 
 year, after the disastrous sea-fight with the Genoese, on Sunday, 
 6th August, in which the Pisans lost many of their galleys, and had 
 16,000 of their best men killed or taken prisoners, "the Florentines 
 (in September) formed a league with the Lucchese, Sienese, &c. 
 together with the Genoese, to make war on Pisa : the Florentines 
 and other Tuscans by land, and the Genoese by sea." Ugolino, 
 who had fled from the battle before it was fully decided, now by 
 bribery and other unfair means induced the Florentines to with- 
 draw secretly from the league ; and by their aid " expelled the Ghi- 
 bellines from Pisa, and made himself master of it with the 
 Guelphs." Vill. vii. 92, 98. See also Annal. Genuens. p. 587; 
 Cronica di Pisa, in Tartin. Supp. Rer. Ital. t. i. p. 564. 
 
 Again, in July 1288, when three parties were competing for the 
 mastery in Pisa, viz. Nino de' Visconti, Judge of Gallura, with 
 
EXERCISES ON PRONUNCIATION. 35 
 
 certain Guelphs ; Ugolino, with the rest of the Guelphs ; and, in 
 opposition to both, " Archbishop Ruggieri degli Ubaldini, with the 
 Lanfranchi, and Gualandi, and Sismondi and other Ghibelline 
 houses : the said Count Ugolino, in order to make himself master, 
 united with the Archbishop and his party, and betrayed Judge 
 Nino, not considering that he was his own grandson, son of his own 
 daughter ; and they arranged that he should be expelled from Pisa 
 with his followers, or seized in person. Nino hearing this, and not 
 finding himself able to make defence, left the city and went to 
 Calci, his castle ; and leagued with the Florentines and Lucchese, 
 to make war on the Pisans. The Count, before Nino was gone, in 
 order the better to conceal his treachery, when every thing was ar- 
 ranged for the expulsion of the Judge, went out of Pisa to a manor 
 of his called Settimo. As soon as he was informed of Nino's depar- 
 ture, he returned to Pisa with great joy, and was made Lord of the 
 city amid great rejoicing and festivity. But his lordliness was of 
 brief duration. Fortune turned against him, as it pleased God, 
 because of his treacheries and sins ; for with truth it was said he 
 had caused Anselmo da Capraia, his sister's son, to be poisoned, 
 out of envy and fear, lest Anselmo, who was much esteemed in Pisa, 
 
 might take his place The force of the Guelphs being thus 
 
 impaired, the Archbishop took means to betray Count Ugolino, and 
 caused him to be suddenly attacked in his palace by the fury of the 
 people, telling them that he had betrayed Pisa, and given up their 
 Castles to the Florentines and Lucchese ; and the people having 
 come upon him without any defence, he surrendered. And in this 
 assault a son and a grandson of Count Ugolino's were killed ; 
 and he himself taken, with two of his sons and-three (or two? as 
 below) of his grandchildren, sons of his son, and put in prison." 
 nil. vii. 121. 
 
 " In the following March, the Pisans, who had imprisoned Count 
 Ugolino with two of his sons, and two sons of his son Count Guelfo 
 (as we have mentioned above), in a tower on the Piazza degli An- 
 ziani, caused the door of that tower to be locked up, the keys to be 
 thrown into the Arno, and all food withheld from the said prisoners, 
 who died of hunger in a few days. But the Count had previously 
 kept demanding penitence with loud cries, and yet they permitted 
 no friar or priest to confess him. All the five, when dead, were 
 dragged together from the tower and meanly interred ; and from 
 thenceforward the said prison was called the Tower of Famine, and 
 always will be. For this cruelty the Pisans throughout the whole 
 world, wherever it became known, were greatly blamed; not so 
 
36 EXERCISES ON PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 much for the Count himself, who by reason of his crimes and treach- 
 ery was perhaps worthy of such a death, but for his sons and grand- 
 sons who were young boys and innocent, ch? erano giovani garzoni 
 e innocenti" Vill. yii. 128. 
 
 For further details see Cronica di Pisa, in Murat. Rer. Ital. t. xv. 
 p. 979, &c. ; Annales Genuen. ibid. t. vi. p. 608, &c.; Fragm. Hist. 
 Pis. ibid. t. xxiv. p. 648, &c. ; and the other Cron. di Pisa, in Tartin. 
 Supplem. Rer. Ital. jfc. j. p. 564, &c. 
 
 LA bocca sollevo dal fiero pasto 
 
 Quel peccator, forbendola a' 1 capelli 
 
 Del capo ch' egli avea 2 diretro 3 guasto. 
 Poi comincio : Tu vuoi ch' io rinnovelli* 
 
 Disperato dolor,, che il cor 5 mi preme, 
 
 Gia pur pensando,^n'a 6 ch' io nefavelli. 7 
 Ma se le mie parole esser den' 8 seme, 
 
 Che frutti infamia al traditor ch' io rodo, 
 
 Parlare e lagrimar vedrai insieine. 
 Io non so chi tu sie, 9 ne per che modo 
 
 Venuto sei quaggiu ; ma Fiorentino 
 
 Mi sembri veramente, quand' io t' oda. 
 Tu del w saper ch' io fui il Conte Ugolino, 
 
 E questi 1' Arcivescovo Ruggieri : 
 
 Or ti diro perch' io son tal vicino. 
 Che per 1' effetto de' suoi mal u pensieri, 
 
 Fidandomi di lui, io fossi preso 
 
 'Eposcia 12 morto 13 dir non e mestieri. u 
 Pero quel che non puoi avere inteso, 
 
 Cioe, come la morte mia fu cruda, 
 
 Udirai ; e saprai se m' ha offeso. 
 Breve pertugio 15 dentro dalla muda, 1( * 
 
 La qual per me ha il titol della fame, 
 
 E in che 17 conviene ancor ch' altri si chiuda, 
 
 1 ai. 6 prima. 10 devi. 34 necessario. 
 
 2 ayeva. 7 parli. u cattivi. 15 buco. 
 
 3 di dietro. 8 devono, 12 dopo. 16 oscura pri^ione. 
 
 4 rinnuovi. 9 sei. 13 ucciso. 1? cui. 
 
 5 cuore. 
 
EXERCISES ON PRONUNCIATION. 37 
 
 M' avea mostrato per lo snoforame 1 
 
 Piu lune gia, quand* io feci il mal 2 sonno, 
 
 Che del future mi squarcio il velame. 3 
 Questi pareva a me maestro e donnof 
 
 Cacciando il lupo e i lupicini al monte, 
 
 Per che 5 i Pisan veder Lucca non ponno? 
 Con cagne magre, stud'tose 7 e conte, 8 
 
 Gualandi con Sismondi, e con Lanfranchi 
 
 S' avea messi dinanzi dalla fronte. 
 In picciol corso mi pareano stanchi 
 
 Lo 9 padre e i figli, e con T agute w scane 11 
 
 Mi parea lor veder fender li u nanchi. 
 Quando fui desto innanzi la dimane, 13 
 
 Pianger senti' fra '1 sonno i miei figliuoli, 
 
 Ch' erano meco, e dimandar del pane. 
 Ben sei crudel, se tu gia non ti duoli, 
 
 Pensando cio ch' il mio cor u s' annunziava : 
 
 E se non piangi, di che pianger suoli ? 
 Gia oran d.esti, e 1' ora s' appressava 
 
 Che il cibo ne soleva essere addotto, 15 
 
 E per suo 16 sogno ciascun dubitava, 
 Ed io sentii chiavar 1 ^ 1' uscio di sotto 
 
 All' orribile torre : ond' io guardai 
 
 Nel viso a' mieifigliuoi 18 senzafar motto. 19 
 Io non piangeva, si dentro impietrai : 
 
 Piangevan elli ; 20 e Anselmuccio mio 
 
 Disse : Tu guardi si ! Padre, che hai ? 
 Pero non lagrimai, ne rispos' io 
 
 Tutto quel giorno, ne la notto appresso, 
 
 Infin che 1* altro Sol nel mondo uscio? 1 
 Come un poco di raggio si fu messo 
 
 Nel doloroso carcere, ed io scorsi 
 
 Per quattro visi il mio aspetto stesso, 
 
 1 apertura. 7 sollecite, ar- 12 i. 17 chiudere a chiave. 
 
 2 cattivo. denti. 13 il giorno. 18 figliuoli. 
 
 3 velo. 8 destre. 14 cuore. 19 parlare. 
 
 4 sigiiore. 9 il. 15 portato. 20 eglino. 
 
 5 cui. 10 acute. 16 il suo. 21 usci. 
 
 6 possono. a denti. 
 
 G 
 
38 EXERCISES ON PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 Ambo 1 le mani per dolor mi morsi ; 
 
 E quei? pensando ch' io ilfessi 3 per voglia 
 Di manicarf di subito levorsi? 
 
 E disser : Padre, assai cifia 6 men doglia? 
 Se tu mangi di noi : tu ne vestisti 
 Queste misere carni, e tu le spoglia. 
 
 Quetaimi 8 allor, per non farli piu tristi : 
 Quel di, e 1' altro stemmo tutti muti : 
 Ahi dura terra, perch e non t' apristi ? 
 
 Poscia 9 che fummo al quarto di venuti, 
 Gaddo mi si gitto disteso a* piedi, 
 Dicendo : Padre mio, che 10 non m' aiuti ? 
 
 Quivi mori ; e come tu mi vedi, 
 Vid' io cascar li tre ad uno ad uno, 
 Tra il quinto di e il sesto, ond* io mi diedi 
 
 Gia cieco a brancolar sovra 11 ciascuno ; 
 
 E tre di li chiamai, poi ch' ei l ' 2 fur 13 morti : 
 Poscia, 1 * piu che il dolor, pote il digiuno. 
 
 Quand' ebbe detto cio, con gli occhi torti 
 Riprese il teschio misero co' denti, 
 Che/wro 15 all' osso, come d r un can, forti. 
 
 Ahi Pisa, vituperio delle genti 
 Del bel paese la dove il si suona ; 
 Poi che i vicini a te punir son lenti, 
 
 Muovasi la Capraia e la Gorgona, 
 
 E faccian siepe ad Arno in su la foce, 
 Si ch' egli 16 annieghi in te ogni persona. 
 
 Che se il Conte Ugolino aveva voce }7 
 D' aver tradita te delle castella 
 Non dovei }9 tu ifyliuoi 20 porre a tal croce. 
 
 Innocenti facea 1' eta novella, 
 
 Novella Tebe t Uguccione e il Brigata, 
 
 E gli altri duo 21 che il canto suso^ 2 appella. 23 
 
 1 tutte e due. 
 
 7 dolore. 
 
 13 furono. 
 
 Iff castelli. 
 
 2 quelli. 
 
 8 mi calmaL 
 
 14 poi. 
 
 19 dove vi. 
 
 3 facessi. 
 
 9 poi. 
 
 15 furono. 
 
 20 figliuoli. 
 
 4 mangiar. 
 
 10 perche. 
 
 16 egli is an ex- 
 
 21 due. 
 
 5 si levarono. 
 
 11 sopra. 
 
 pletive. 
 
 22 di sopra. 
 
 6 sara. 
 
 12 eglino. 
 
 J * nome. 
 
 23 nomina. 
 
EXERCISES ON PRONUNCIATION. 39 
 
 TRANSLATION. 
 
 From the fell repast that sinner raised his mouth, wiping 
 it upon the hair of the head he had laid waste behind. Then 
 he began : " Thou wiliest that I renew desperate. grief, which 
 wrings my heart, even at the very thought, before I tell 
 thereof. But if my words are to be a seed, that may bear 
 fruit of infamy to the traitor whom I gnaw, thou shalt see 
 me speak and weep at the same time. I know not who 
 thou mayst be, nor by what mode thou hast come down 
 here ; but, when I hear thee, in truth thou seemest to me a 
 Florentine. Thou hast to know that I was Count Ugolino, 
 and this the Archbishop Ruggieri : now I will tell thee why 
 I am such a neighbour to him. That by the effect of his ill 
 devices I, confiding in him, was taken and thereafter put to 
 death, it is not necessary to say : but that which thou canst 
 not have learnt, that is, how cruel was my death, thou shalt 
 hear and know if he has offended me. 
 
 " A narrow hole within the mew, which from me has the 
 title of Famine, and in which others yet must be shut up, 
 had through its opening already shown me several moons, 1 
 when I slept the evil sleep that rent for me the curtain of 
 the future. This man seemed to me lord and master, chasing 
 the wolf and his whelps, upon the mountain 2 for which the 
 Pisans cannot see Lucca. With hounds meagre, keen, and 
 dexterous, he had put in front of him Gualandi with Sismondi, 
 and with Lanfranchi. 3 After a short course, the father and 
 his sons seemed to me weary ; and methought I saw their 
 flanks torn by the sharp teeth. When I awoke before the 
 dawn, I heard my sons who were with me, weeping amid 
 their sleep, and asking for bread. Thou art right cruel, if 
 thou dost not grieve already at the thought of what my 
 heart foreboded ; and if thou weepest not, at what art thou 
 
 1 From July to March. 
 
 2 Monte St Giuliano, between Pisa and Lucca, which are some 
 twelve miles apart. 
 
 3 Ruggieri, Lord and Master of the chase ; the Ghibelline nobles, 
 leaders of the keen hounds or populace ; Ugolino, the father Wolf 
 with sons. 
 
40 EXERCISES ON PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 used to weep \ They were now awake, and the hour ap- 
 proaching at which our food used to be brought us, and each 
 was anxious from his dream, and below I heard the outlet 
 of the horrible tower locked up : whereat I looked into the 
 faces of my sons, without uttering a word. I did not weep : 
 so stony grew I within. They wept ; and my little Anselm 
 said : c Thou lookest so ! Father, what ails thee 1 9 But I 
 shed no tear, nor answered all that day, nor the next night, 
 till another sun came forth upon the world. When a small 
 ray was sent into the doleful prison, and I discerned in their 
 four faces the aspect of my own, I bit on both my hands for 
 grief ; and they, thinking that I did it from desire of eating, 
 of a sudden rose up and said : f Father, it will give us much 
 less pain, if thou wilt eat of us : thou didst put upon us this 
 miserable flesh, and do thou strip it off.' Then I calmed 
 myself, in order not to make them more unhappy. That 
 day and the next we all were mute. Ah, hard earth ! why 
 didst thou not open I When we had come to the fourth 
 day, Gaddo threw himself stretched out at my feet, saying ; 
 'My father! why don't you help me I 9 There he died; and 
 even as thou seest me, saw I the three fall one by one, be- 
 tween the fifth day and the sixth, whence I betook me, 
 already blind, to groping over each ; and for three days 
 called them, after they were dead. Then fasting had more 
 power than grief." 1 
 
 When he had spoken this, with eyes distorted he seized 
 the miserable skull again with his teeth, which as a dog's 
 were strong upon the bone. Ah, Pisa ! scandal to the people 
 of the beauteous land where " Si " is heard ! 2 Since thy 
 
 1 So that Ugolino died on the ninth day : and the old Pisan com- 
 mentator, Buti, says the tower was opened after eight days, " dopo 
 li otto giorni" Many volumes have been written about verse 75. 
 Does the piu pote (" was more powerful ") indicate only that hunger 
 killed Ugolino? Or that fasting overcame his senses, and made 
 him die eating as his poor children had invited \ The words admit 
 of either meaning. 
 
 2 Italy, where S\ is the word for yes. Dante (Vulg. Eloq. i. 8) 
 gives Jo or ja as characteristic of the Germans, Saxons, &c. ; Oc 
 
EXERCISES ON PRONUNCIATION. 41 
 
 neighbours are slow to punish thee, let the Capraia and Gor- 
 gona 1 move, and hedge up the Arno at its mouth, that it 
 may drown in thee every living soul. For if Count Ugolino 
 had the fame of having betrayed thee in thy castles, thou 
 oughtest not to have put his sons into such torture. Their 
 youthful age, thou modern Thebes ! made innocent Uguc- 
 cione and Brigata, and the other two whom my song above 
 has named. 2 
 
 of the " Spaniards " (the Langue d'Oc, used at the Court of Castile ; 
 as well as in Provence, to part of which it gave name) ; Oil or oui 
 of the French, and St of the Italians. 
 
 1 Small islands, not far from the mouth of the Arno. 
 
 2 Troya in his Veltro Allegorico (Flor. 1826, p. 28, &c.) asserts, in 
 opposition to Villani and other contemporary historians, that Ugo- 
 lino's sons and grandsons were not innocent, the Archbishop not 
 guilty, &c. ; but the Veltro still seems much more like a romance 
 than a piece of sober history. One is led to suspect speedy proofs 
 of many hazardous assertions in it. Such books darken every part 
 of the subjects on which they treat, and are inexcusable among 
 serious men. 
 
PART II], 
 
 PRINCIPAL RULES OF THE ITALIAN 
 LANGUAGE. 
 
PAKT III. 
 
 PRINCIPAL RULES OF THE ITALIAN 
 LANGUAGE. 
 
 GENDER. 
 
 1. There is no neuter gender in Italian. All nouns are 
 either masculine or feminine. 
 
 2. All nouns are feminine except those that end in o, 
 me, re, nte. 
 
 3. Nouns ending in a are feminine. The exceptions are 
 a few nouns derived from the Greek, the most common 
 of which are 
 
 Clima, climate. 
 Diadema, diadem. 
 Plan eta, planet. 
 Poeta, poet. 
 
 Programma, programme. 
 Sistema, system. 
 Stratagemma, stratagem. 
 Tema, theme. 
 
 Poema, poem. 
 
 4. All nouns ending in o are masculine except mano 
 (hand). 
 
 5. Nouns ending in e may be either masculine or 
 feminine. No certain rule can be given on the subject. 
 Nouns ending in me, re, nte, are generally masculine. 
 
 6. Nouns ending in / and u are few, and they are gen- 
 erally feminine. Dl and its compounds are masculine, 
 as Lunedi (Monday), Martedl (Tuesday). Peru and 
 Corfu are also masculine. 
 
 7. The names of fruit-trees are masculine, and of the 
 
46 , NUMBER. 
 
 fruit, feminine, except fico (fig), porno (apple), arancia 
 (orange), cedro (cedar). These names are applied both to 
 the tree and the fruit. 
 
 8. Some words have two terminations in the singular ; 
 as, cavaliere or cavaliero (a knight), barbiere or barbiero 
 (a barber), straniere or straniero (a stranger), sentiere or 
 sentiero (a path). Cavaliere, barbiere, straniero, and sen- 
 tiero, are more used. Both terminations are masculine. 
 
 NUMBER. 
 
 9. Feminine nouns ending in a change for the plural 
 the a into e. All other nouns change the last vowel 
 into i. 
 
 1 0. Nouns ending with io drop the o for the plural if 
 the i is not accented. 
 
 11. Some nouns ending in io in the singular have for 
 their plural ii or j. This is seldom done now, except 
 for the sake of distinguishing one noun from another. 
 Thus, tempio (atemple), becomes tempii or tempj in the 
 plural, to distinguish it from the plural of tempo (time), 
 which would otherwise be the same. 
 
 12. Dissyllables ending in co and #o change them into 
 chi and ghi] except porco (pig), Greco (Greek), mago 
 (magician). 
 
 13. Some words, as mendico (a beggar), may be written 
 either with an h in the plural or without it (mendichi or 
 mendici}. 
 
 14. Words of more than two syllables, ending in co 
 and go, preceded by a consonant, have their plurals in chi 
 and ghi; as, albergo (inn), alberghi (inns). 
 
 15. Nouns ending in ca and ga change these termina- 
 tions into che and ghe in the plural. 
 
NUMBER. 47 
 
 16. Nouns ending in ie have no variation in their 
 plural ; as, specie (species), requie (rest), superficie (sur- 
 face), barbarie ( cruelty \progenie (progeny) serie (series), 
 effigie (effigy). 
 
 17. Nouns accented on the last vowel do not change. 
 
 18. The few nouns that end in i do not change. 
 
 19. The plural of Dio (God) is Dei; of ubmo (man), 
 ubmini; of bue (ox), buoi. 
 
 20. Collective nouns, such as popolo (people), esercito 
 (army), assembled (assembly), are generally used in the 
 singular. 
 
 21. The masculine nouns migliajo (a thousand), cen- 
 tinajo (a hundred), uovo (an egg), miglio (a mile), pajo (a 
 pair), staio (a bushel), mbggio (a sort of measure), have 
 for their plural migliaia, centinaja, nova, miglia, paja, staja, 
 mbggia. All these plurals are feminine. 
 
 22. The following nouns have two plurals ; the first, 
 regular and masculine, ending in i the second, irregular 
 and feminine, ending in a : 
 
 Anello, ring. 
 Braccio, arm. 
 CalcagiiOy heel. 
 Castillo, castle. 
 CigliOy eyelid. 
 Corno, horn. 
 Dito, finger. 
 FilOy thread. 
 
 FondamentOy foundation. 
 FruttOy fruit. 
 Fuso, spindle. 
 Gesto, gesture. 
 Ginocchio, knee. 
 
 Gomito, elbow. 
 
 Grido, cry. 
 
 Labbro, lip. 
 
 Legno, wood. 
 
 Lenzuolo, sheet. 
 
 Membro 9 member. 
 
 Muro 9 wall. 
 
 6sso 9 bone. 
 
 Porno, apple. 
 
 Quadrello, arrow, (poet.) 
 
 Eiso, laughter. 
 
 SaccOy sad. 
 
 Strido, scream, (poet.) 
 
 23. The feminine plural is used in preference. Coma 
 means horns ; cbrni is the plural of cbrno (horn), a musi- 
 
48 ARTICLE. 
 
 cal instrument ; lefrutta means the dessert ; gesta means 
 deeds ; gomiti is the plural of gomito, a sort of measure ; 
 legna means firewood ; membri means members of an as- 
 sembly ; membra, limbs ; muri means walls, but mura is 
 used only for the walls of a town. 
 
 ARTICLE. 
 
 24. The definite article for the feminine is la (plural 
 
 te). 
 
 25. The definite articles for the masculine are lo (plural 
 gli], and il (plural ). 
 
 26. Lo is placed before a vowel, or an s followed by a 
 consonant. 
 
 27. Before z we may use either il or lo. 
 
 28. La and lo take an apostrophe before a word be- 
 ginning with a vowel. In the plural the elision is avoided 
 unless the two vowels are the same. 
 
 29. Gli never takes an apostrophe except when fol- 
 lowed by i. 
 
 30. Di (of), a (to), da (from), in (in), con (with), su 
 (on), are joined to the articles when followed by them, 
 so as to form one word. 
 
 31. Di, in, and con, when they are joined to the ar- 
 ticles, are changed into de, ne, and co. 
 
 32. The prepositions con and su are joined to il and , 
 but may be joined or not to the other articles. 
 
 33. 11 is joined to the prepositions by adding I to them ; 
 thus, del, al, dal, nel, col, sul. 
 
 34. Lo, la, and le, when joined to the prepositions, 
 double the I ; thus, dello, della, delle ; allo, alia, alle, &c. 
 
 35. / and gli are joined to the prepositions without 
 any change. 
 
ARTICLE. 49 
 
 36. Per is sometimes joined to 7, as pel mezzo (through 
 the middle). This combination is not much used in con- 
 versation. 
 
 37. Per is sometimes followed by lo. We say, per lo 
 piu (for the most), per lo meno (at least). 
 
 38. Signore and signora are preceded by an article, 
 except when addressing a person by these words. 
 
 39. Infinitives of verbs, adjectives, and adverbs, when 
 used as substantives, take an article. 
 
 40. An article is often placed before the names of cele- 
 brated persons ; as, il Tasso, la Jenny Lind. It is used 
 also before familiar names in the feminine ; as, la Ca~ 
 terina. 
 
 41. Dei is preceded by gli. 
 
 42. Some is translated by di with an article where 
 quantity is expressed. When we speak of number, alcuni 
 or alcune is used. Datemi del pane (Give me some bread), 
 Datemi alcuni libri (Give me some books). Di with an 
 article meaning some may be called the Partitive article. 
 
 43. II is sometimes used to make the following words 
 emphatical. Thus to denote a particular Friday, as, 
 I was arrested on Friday the 13th of October, we say, 
 Fui arrestato il Venerdl 13 Ottobre. 
 
 44. The definitive article is used instead of on in 
 phrases like this : He comes on Tuesdays and Fridays 
 (Viene il Martedl ed il Venerdl). But I shall come on 
 Tuesday is translated by Verro VenerdL 
 
 45. The English say, The father and sons ; the Ital- 
 ians, 11 padre ed ifigli. 
 
 46. The indefinite article un, a, or an, is ued before a 
 word that does not begin with an s followed by a con- 
 sonant. 
 
 47. A is not translated before hundred and thousand 
 
50 ARTICLE. 
 
 if cento and milk are used. He had a hundred soldiers 
 (Aveva cento soldati). We may say, however, Un centinajo 
 di soldati, un migliajo di navi. The reason is, that cento 
 and mille are adjectives, and centinajo and migliajo nouns. 
 
 48. The English make use of a or an before nouns of 
 measure or weight, but the Italians use the definite ar- 
 ticle. He sells wine at two shillings a bottle ( Vende il 
 vino due scellini la bottiglia) ; I have bought corn for six 
 pauls a bushel (Ho comprato il grano a sei paoli lo 
 staio). 
 
 49. When speaking of time, a is translated by the de- 
 finite article. I pay two guineas a- week (Pago due 
 ghinee la settimana). We may say also per settimana. 
 
 50. The indefinite article is not expressed in Italian 
 after the verb to be, and before a noun denoting country, 
 profession, or dignity. He is an Irishman (e Irlandese) ; 
 You will be an advocate (sarete avvocato) ; He is a min- 
 ister of state (e ministro di stato). 
 
 51. A is suppressed before the title of a book. An 
 English Grammar (Grammatica Inglese). 
 
 52. In exclamatory sentences the a is not translated. 
 What a fine picture ! (Che bel quadro!) 
 
 CASE. 
 
 53. In order to understand the rules on the personal 
 pronouns, it will be useful to explain the names of the 
 Latin Cases. See Part I. section 57. 
 
 54. The Cases in Latin were six, and were called 
 Nominative, Genitive, Dative, Accusative, Vocative, and 
 Ablative. 
 
 55. The noun which formed the subject of the propo- 
 sition was called the Nominative. 
 
CASE. 51 
 
 56. The noun which expressed the object of the action 
 of a transitive verb was called the Accusative. 
 
 57. When we speak to any person, we often use some 
 words, as, Sir, my sister, &c., for the name of a person 
 or of his rank, &c., to call his attention to us. Such 
 nouns were said to be in the Vocative case. 
 
 58. The other three cases the Genitive, Dative , and 
 Ablative expressed the same relation as the preposition 
 di (of), a (to), da (from), do in Italian. These preposi- 
 tions are therefore called Segnacasi, prepositions marking 
 cases. 
 
 59. The nominative case is called in Italian Caso retto, 
 to distinguish it from the other cases called Casi obliqui. 
 
 PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 60. The personal pronouns are, Egli for the masculine, 
 Ella for the feminine. Their plurals are, Eglino and 
 Elleno. 
 
 61. There is also another personal pronoun, Esso for 
 the masculine, and Essa for the feminine. Their plurals 
 are, Essi and Esse. 
 
 62. Egli and Ella are used for persons only ; Esso 
 and Essa are used both for persons and things. 
 
 63. Egli and Eglino are used in the nominative only ; 
 in the other cases we use lui for the singular, and loro 
 for the plural. 
 
 64. In the same way, Ella and Elleno are the nomi- 
 natives, and Lei and Loro are the other cases. 
 
 65. Esso, Essa, Essi, and Esse, are the same in all 
 cases. 
 
 66. After Essere (to be), and Parere (to appear), desso, 
 
52 PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 dessi, &c., are used instead of esso, essi, &c., for the sake 
 of euphony. 
 
 67. The reflective pronoun is se ; it has no nominative, 
 and is the same whether it be masculine or feminine, 
 singular or plural. 
 
 68. Egli is often an expletive, Egli e vero che, &c. 
 It is true that. We may say also, E vero che, &c. 
 
 69. The pronouns in the nominative are often omitted 
 before a verb. We may say either lo pranzero alle sette 
 (I shall dine at seven), or simply Pranzero alle sette. 
 When the omission creates an obscurity it should be 
 avoided. 
 
 70. It is I, It is you, &c., are translated by Sono io, 
 Sei tu, &c. 
 
 71. Con me, con te, con se (with me, with thee, with 
 him or with her), may be expressed by meco, teco, seco. 
 
 72. If I were he, If I were she, are translated by S'io 
 fossi lui, S'io fossi lei. Happy is he, Happy am I, by 
 Lui beato, mefelice. 
 
 73. All the pronouns become emphatical when coming 
 after the verb. Parlero io means I shall speak myself. 
 
 74. I stood before him is translated by Io stava dinanzi 
 a lui, but also by Io gll stava dinanzi. (See Sect. 35.) 
 
 75. Esso is an expletive affixed to lungo (along), sovra 
 (upon) ; lunghesso il flume ; sovresso il ponte. These ex- 
 pressions are poetical. We meet also in classical writers 
 con esso lui, con esso voi; but we should avoid these ex- 
 pressions in conversation. General rule : Prefer sim- 
 plicity when you can. 
 
 76. In addressing any person in Italian, the third per- 
 son feminine is used for strangers as a mark of respect. 
 
 77. The use of the third person feminine in addressing 
 a person was introduced from the custom, once very fre- 
 
PRONOMINAL PARTICLES. 53 
 
 quent, of using Vostra Signoria or Vossignoria (often writ- 
 ten V. S.)j meaning your lordship. This expression is 
 seldom heard now, but the pronoun in the third person 
 feminine seems to imply it. 
 
 78. Voi (you) is used towards inferiors, and also as 
 showing a certain degree of familiarity between equals. 
 
 79. Tu (thou) is used between intimate friends or 
 relations, and is the mark not only of equality but of the 
 greatest familiarity. 
 
 80. Voi is also used as a mark of great respect in ad- 
 dressing sovereigns; and Tu, like Thou in English, is 
 used as a mark of the highest respect in addressing the 
 Deity. 
 
 81. Loro without a preposition is used instead of a 
 loro before a verb. 
 
 PRONOMINAL PARTICLES. 
 
 82. The words mi, d, ti, vi, si, lo, la, gli, le, ne, which 
 are used often instead of the pronouns, may be called 
 PRONOMINAL PARTICLES. It is of the utmost importance 
 that the proper use and signification of these particles 
 should be thoroughly understood. 
 
 TABLE OF THE PRONOMINAL PARTICLES. 
 
 1. Mi, to me, me. ! 6. Lo, him, it. 
 
 2. Ci, to us, us, in it, to it, | 7. Gli, to him, to it, them. 
 
 in them, to them. 
 
 3. Ti 9 to thee, thee. 
 
 4. Vi, to you, you, in it, to 
 
 it, in them, to them. 
 
 5. Si, to himself, himself, to 
 
 themselves, themselves.*) 
 
 8. La, her. 
 
 9. Le, to her, them. 
 
 10. Ne, of or from him, her, 
 it, them. 
 
 ' Si is used for both genders and. numbers. 
 
54 PKONOMINAL PARTICLES. 
 
 RULES ON THE PRONOMINAL PARTICLES. 
 
 83. I. The pronominal particles are either pronouns 
 under a different form, or pronouns joined to a preposi- 
 tion. 
 
 84. II. The pronominal particles are always placed 
 before the verb, unless they are affixed to it. The pro- 
 nouns that correspond to them are generally placed after 
 the verb. 
 
 85. III. The pronominal particles are used in prefer- 
 ence, the pronouns only when emphasis is required. 
 lo vi amo (I love you) ; lo amo voi come voi amate me 
 (I love you as you love me) ; Mi date un libro (You give 
 me a book) ; Date un libro a me? (Is it to me that you 
 give a book ?) 
 
 86. IV. The pronominal particles are affixed to the 
 verb in the infinitive, present and past participle, and the 
 imperative, except when the imperative is negative, or 
 in the third person singular or plural. 
 
 87. V. The last vowel of the infinitive is always cut 
 off when a pronominal particle is affixed to it ; and when 
 the infinitive ends, like condurre (to conduct), with an r 
 before the last syllable, the latter is cut off entirely. 
 Voglio condurvi io (I wish to conduct you myself). 
 
 88. VI. The pronominal particles are also affixed to 
 the interjection ecco (behold) ; eccomi (behold me, or 
 here I am). 
 
 89. VII. When ci and vi are used with mi, ti, or si, 
 they come after them. 
 
 90. VIII. Mi, ti, ci, vi, si, are changed into me, te, cc, 
 ve, se, when used with lo, gli, la, le, ne ; and the two 
 words are joined together, Egli melo da. 
 
PRONOMINAL PARTICLES. 55 
 
 91. IX. Gil loses the g when affixed to mi, ci, ti, vi, 
 si, or gli meaning themselves. 
 
 92. X. Gli is changed into glie, and prefixed to ?o, ft, 
 Za, Ze, ne, when these particles are used with it. 
 
 93. XI. Gil, before Zo, ft, Za, le, ne, means not only to 
 him, but also to her. Glieli da means he gives them to 
 him, and he gives them to her. 
 
 94. XII. Li is sometimes used for gli, and often when 
 we speak of the days of the month, ft due, ft tre, &c. (the 
 second, the third), &c. 
 
 95. XIII. Lo (him or it) and non (not) may be joined 
 and form nol. I do not deny it, is translated either by lo 
 non lo nego, or lo nol nego. 
 
 96. XIV. II is sometimes used as a pronominal par- 
 ticle, and instead of lo. I saluted him is translated by 
 il salutai, or lo salutai. Lo, however, is more commonly 
 used, and is more agreeable to the ear. 
 
 97. XV. It is a general rule, that when to a mono- 
 syllable, or to a word accented on the last vowel, is 
 affixed a termination or a word beginning with a con- 
 sonant, this consonant should be doubled. Thus, if to 
 dd (give) is joined mi (to me), we say dammi, and not 
 dami. 
 
 98. XVI. So is very often translated by lo (it) ; I 
 think so (lo credo) ; do so (fatelo), &e. 
 
 99. XVII. Ne signifies also a noi and noi (to us and 
 us). Ne danno molte cose (they give to us many things). 
 
 100. XVIII. Gli never doubles the g when affixed 
 to a verb. We say dirotti* (I shall say to thee), but 
 dirogli (I shall say to him). 
 
 101. XIX. Si before an active verb often gives to it 
 
 * The pronominal particles are sometimes affixed to other parts 
 of the verb besides those mentioned in Section 86. 
 
 D 
 
56 PRONOMINAL PARTICLES. 
 
 a passive signification. Come si chiama means not only 
 how does he call himself, but also how is he called. 
 
 102. XX. Si sometimes seems to have the signifi- 
 cation of an indefinite nominative, equivalent to the 
 English one, man, they. Come si chiama may thus be 
 translated by How do they call him. At home, one does 
 as one pleases (a casa, si fa quel che si vuole) * People 
 may say what they like (si pud dire quel che si vuole). 
 
 103. XXI. Sometimes an entire sentence forms the 
 subject of the proposition when si is used. Si dice che 
 verrd la regina ad Edimburgo (it is said that the queen 
 will come to Edinburgh). Here the nominative of si 
 dice is che verra la regina ad Edimburgo. 
 
 104. XXII. When the verb is reflective, si cannot be 
 used as an indefinite nominative, but, as in English, 
 we may use uno (one), noi (we), &c., as Una si lusinga in- 
 vano (one flatters himself in vain), or Noi ci lusinghiamo 
 in vano (we flatter ourselves in vain), or Si lusingano 
 invano (they flatter themselves in vain). 
 
 105. The possessive pronoun is often translated by the 
 pronominal particles, when we speak of any thing referred 
 principally or belonging to the person spoken of. I have 
 hurt my finger is translated by Mi sono fatto male al 
 dito. 
 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 106. Adjectives end either in o or in e. Those that 
 end in o are masculine, the o being changed into a for the 
 feminine. Those that end in e are both masculine and 
 feminine. 
 
 * As the student must accustom himself to remember the open 
 sound of e and o, the circumflex accent hitherto used to distinguish 
 it will now be seldom used. When preceded by u 9 o is always 
 open, and therefore need not be marked. 
 
ADJECTIVES. 57 
 
 107. Adjectives follow the same rules as nouns for the 
 plural. The plural of a is e ; o and e take i. 
 
 108. Tanto and cotanto (so much), quanta (how much), 
 troppo (too much), altrettanto (as much), molto (much), 
 poco (little), being adjectives, are changed into a for the 
 feminine, as tanta, quanta. Their plural is tanti, tante ; 
 quanti, quante, &c. 
 
 109. Piu, meno, assai (more, less, and many), are un- 
 changeable in their termination. 
 
 110. A little, in the phrase give me a little wine, being 
 a substantive, and signifying a small quantity of, is trans- 
 lated by un poco di. Datemi un poco di vino (give me 
 a little wine). 
 
 111. The adjective alquanto may be used instead of 
 un poco di] as, datemi alquanto vino, or un poco di 
 vino. 
 
 112. Cosifatto is the same as tale (such). Non dite 
 cosifatte cose (do not say such things). 
 
 113. Parecchio in the singular means such or similar, 
 in the plural it means several. Ho parecchi libri (I have 
 several books) ; Come avete potuto fare una cosa parec- 
 chia (how could you do such a thing ?) 
 
 114. Piu may be used instead of parecchi and parec- 
 chie. Ho piu libri, ho piu case (I have several books, I 
 have several houses). 
 
 115. Mezzo (half) agrees with a substantive when 
 placed before it, but assumes the meaning of the sub- 
 stantive meta when placed after it. Una mezza bot 
 tiglia (half a bottle) ; Una bottiglia e mezzo (a bottle and 
 a half). 
 
 116. Bello (beautiful), quello (that), santo (saint), lose 
 the last syllable before masculine nouns beginning with 
 a consonant, except it be an s followed by a consonant. 
 
58 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 117. Bel and quel become bei and quei, or be' and que' 7 
 in the plural. San has only santi for the plural. 
 
 118. Grande is changed into gran before nouns both 
 masculine and feminine, if they do not begin with a vowel, 
 or s followed by a consonant. 
 
 119. Buono loses the o before masculine nouns, ex- 
 cept they begin with s followed by a consonant. 
 
 120. Adjectives expressing figure, form, colour, taste, 
 or derived from the name of a nation or from a verb, 
 generally follow the noun. Una tavola rotonda (a round 
 table) ; un vestito nero (a black dress), &e. 
 
 121. It is often desirable to place the adjective after 
 the noun when the former is composed of a greater num- 
 ber of syllables, as, un libro eccellentissimo ; also when 
 two or more adjectives qualify the noun ; but in such cases 
 we must be guided entirely by the rules of euphony. 
 
 122. Benedetto is sometimes an expression of impa- 
 tience. If a man keep us waiting, we say in Italian, 
 Quel benedetto uomo non viene (literally, that blessed 
 man does not come). 
 
 COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES. 
 
 123. When in comparisons of equality the first term 
 of the comparison is indicated by the word cost or si (so), 
 the second term is always indicated by the word come (as). 
 Siete cost buona or si buona come bella ; you are so (as) 
 good as you are beautiful. 
 
 124. Tanto is always followed by quanto. Avete tanto 
 danaro quanto ilfratel vostro (you have as much money 
 as your brother). 
 
 125. Tale (such) is always followed by quale (as). 
 Tali dobbiamo essere quali vogliamo comparire (we 
 ought to be such as we wish to appear). 
 
COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES. 59 
 
 126. Cost, tanto, and tale, may be understood, and we 
 may say, Siete buona come bella ; Avete danaro quanto 
 il fratel vostro ; Dobbiamo essere quali vogliamo com- 
 parire. 
 
 127. Tanto, quanto, tale, quale, are used as adjectives 
 when followed by a substantive. Ho tanti servitori quanti 
 ne avete voi (I have as many servants as you). 
 
 128. More... than, less... than, are translated by piu 
 ...di, meno...di, if the comparison is between substan- 
 tives, personal pronouns, or two infinitives ; and by piu 
 ...che, meno... che, in all other cases. Sono piu grande 
 di voi (I am taller than you are) ; E piu prudente che 
 ddtto (he is more prudent than learned). 
 
 129. Than followed by a verb not in the infinitive 
 mood is rendered by che non. Essi lianno meno danaro 
 che non credete (they have less money than you think). 
 
 130. When the comparison is between verbs, we may 
 say piu che (more than), or piu di quello che ; meno che 
 non, or meno di quello che non. Spende piu che non 
 guadagna, or Spende piu di quello che guadagna (he 
 spends more than he gains). 
 
 131. The following words are comparatives derived 
 from the Latin : 
 
 1. Maggiore, greater. 
 
 2. Minors, less. 
 
 3. Peggiore, worse. 
 
 4. Migliore, better. 
 
 5. Meglio, better, (adv.) 
 
 6. PeggiOy worse, (adv.) 
 
 132. It must be observed that migliore and peggiore 
 are adjectives ; meglio and peggio adverbs. 
 
 133. The superlative absolute is formed by adding 
 issimo to the adjective. Ell 1 era bellissima (she was most 
 beautiful) ; or by placing molto before it, EW eya molto 
 Leila. 
 
60 COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES. 
 
 134. Sciocco and sciocca (foolish) make the superlative 
 schioccherello and scidccherella. The h is here added to 
 the terminations erello and erella, to preserve the hard 
 sound of the a in sciocco and sciocca. 
 
 135. The superlative absolute may become an adverb ; 
 thus from grandissimo we may form grandissimamente. 
 
 136. A superlative absolute may be expressed by 
 placing tutto before the adjective, or by the repetition of 
 the adjective : E tutto chiuso, or e chiuso chiuso (it is all 
 shut up). This last form is rather familiar. 
 
 137. The superlative of relation is indicated by placing- 
 an article before piu and meno : il piu forte di tutti gli 
 uomini. 
 
 138. The following superlatives are derived from the 
 Latin : 
 
 1. Ottimo, best. 
 
 2. Pessimo, worst. 
 0. Minima, least. 
 4. InfimOy lowest. 
 
 5. Supremo, highest. 
 
 6. Acerrimo, most harsh or 
 cruel, 
 
 7. Celeberrimo, most famous. 
 
 139. The definite article before a comparative is not 
 translated into Italian. The more difficult a thing is, the 
 more honourable it is (piu una cosa e difficile piu essa 
 e onorevole). 
 
 140. Sometimes tanto e quanta are placed before piu 
 and meno. Tanto piu uno e ignorante, tanto piu cgli e 
 pronto nel giudicare (the more ignorant a man is, the 
 more ready he is to judge). The tanto , like the article 
 the in English, serves to give force to the sentence. 
 
 141. Come and quanto may be changed into al pari 
 di (equally). Lo conosco al pari di voi (I know him as 
 well as you do). 
 
61 
 
 AUGMENTATIVES AND DIMINUTIVES. 
 
 142. Augmentatives and diminutives are words whose 
 signification is modified by the addition of one or more 
 syllables. 
 
 143. The termination one added to a word conveys 
 the idea of greatness. All feminine nouns that receive 
 this termination become masculine. Example : La tavola 
 (the table) ; II tavolone (the large table). 
 
 144. Feminine adjectives do not change their gender 
 when one is affixed to them. She is very silly, is trans- 
 lated by Ella e una scioccona. 
 
 145. The termination ino, which adds to the noun the 
 idea of little, sometimes renders it masculine. Thus from 
 tavola (table) we form tavolino (small table). 
 
 146. The termination accio expresses contempt ; as, 
 omaccio (a contemptible man) ; donnaccia (a contemptible 
 woman). 
 
 147. Uomo (man) always loses the vowel u when any 
 termination is affixed to it. 
 
 148. The terminations azzo and astro, like accio, 
 express contempt, but are less used : Popolazzo (mob) ; 
 giovanastro (a despicable youth). 
 
 149. Otto means rather, as grassotto (rather fat). 
 
 150. The termination ino expresses not only littleness, 
 but a certain affection towards the object ; etto conveys 
 the same idea, but it may also mark contempt. Exam- 
 ples : FanduIUno, fanciulletto (little child). 
 
 151. The termination uzzo (omuzzo, little man, dwarf) 
 expresses littleness, the effect of extraordinary leanness 
 in a person of very small stature. 
 
 152. Erello (vecckieretto, little old man) may indicate 
 
62 AUGMENTATIVES AND DIMINUTIVES. 
 
 smallness alone, and also levity and want of dignity 
 in the object so qualified ; as when we speak of a vain 
 and affected man (vanarello) ; of a foolish girl (pazzarelld), 
 &c. 
 
 153. Icciuola (omicciuolOj worthless little man) may 
 denote physical defect in size, and the little importance 
 of the individual or object to which it is attributed. 
 
 154. Icdattolo and icciatto (omicciattolo omicciatto, 
 contemptible man) expresses a very great degree of con- 
 tempt. 
 
 155. Some words are susceptible of one termination 
 rather than another. 
 
 156. Adjectives and some adverbs can be thus modi- 
 fied : caro (dear), carino, carina ; bello (fine), bettino, 
 lellina ; and bene (well), benino, benone. 
 
 157. There are double augmentatives and diminu- 
 tives : ladro (thief), ladrone (great thief), ladronacdo 
 (great ugly thief) ; cosa (thing), cosetta (little thing), 
 cosettina (very little thing). 
 
 158. Each termination expresses a different idea or 
 shade. There is a variation of meaning, which we can 
 learn only by experience and practice, in the changes of 
 which some words are susceptible; as, vecchio, vecchie- 
 rellino, vecchiettino, vecchietto, vecchierello, vecchiotto, vec- 
 chiuzzo. 
 
 159. The use of augmentatives and diminutives is 
 most frequently admitted in the familiar style. 
 
63 
 
 
 NUMERALS. 
 
 
 160. The numeral adjectives are divided 
 
 into Cardinal 
 
 and Ordinal. 
 
 
 
 
 CARDINAL NUMBERS. 
 
 
 Uno, 
 
 one. 
 
 Didass'tte, 
 
 seventeen. 
 
 Due, 
 
 two. 
 
 Didotto, 
 
 eighteen. 
 
 Tre, 
 
 three. 
 
 Didannove, 
 
 nineteen. 
 
 Quattro, 
 
 four. 
 
 Venti, 
 
 twenty. 
 
 Cinque, 
 
 five. 
 
 Ventuno, 
 
 twenty-one. 
 
 S&, 
 
 six. 
 
 Trenta, 
 
 thirty. 
 
 Sette, 
 
 seven. 
 
 Quaranta, 
 
 forty. 
 
 otto, 
 
 eight. 
 
 Cinquanta, 
 
 fifty. 
 
 N6ve, 
 
 nine. 
 
 Sessanta, 
 
 sixty. 
 
 Died, 
 
 ten. 
 
 Stftanta, 
 
 seventy. 
 
 Undid, 
 
 eleven. 
 
 Ottanta, 
 
 eighty. 
 
 Dddid, 
 
 twelve. 
 
 Novanta, 
 
 ninety. 
 
 Tredid, 
 
 thirteen. 
 
 Cento, 
 
 hundred. 
 
 Quattordid, 
 Qutndid, 
 
 fourteen, 
 fifteen. 
 
 Due cento, ) 
 Dugento, j 
 
 two hundred. 
 
 Sedici, 
 
 sixteen. 
 
 Milk, 
 
 thousand. 
 
 
 ORDINAL NUMBERS. 
 
 
 Primo, 
 
 first. 
 
 Dedmo sesto, 
 
 sixteenth. 
 
 Secondo, 
 
 second. 
 
 Dedmo settimo, 
 
 seventeenth. 
 
 Terzo, 
 
 third. 
 
 Dedmo ottavo, 
 
 eighteenth. 
 
 Quarto, 
 
 fourth. 
 
 Dedmo nono, 
 
 nineteenth. 
 
 Quinto, 
 
 fifth. 
 
 Ventesimo, 
 
 twentieth. 
 
 Sesto, 
 Settimo, 
 
 sixth, 
 seventh. 
 
 Ventesimo primo, 
 vigesimo primo, 
 
 Uwenty-first. 
 
 Ottavo, 
 
 eighth. 
 
 Trentesimo, 
 
 thirtieth. 
 
 Nona, 
 
 ninth. 
 
 Quarantesimo, 
 
 fortieth. 
 
 Dedmo, 
 
 tenth. 
 
 Cinquantesimo, 
 
 fiftieth. 
 
 Undedmo, de-~ 
 
 >- eleventh 
 
 Sessantesimo, 
 
 sixtieth. 
 
 dmo primo, 
 
 
 Settantesimo, 
 
 seventieth. 
 
 Duodecimo, de- * 
 
 >- twelfth. 
 
 Ottantesimo, 
 
 eightieth. 
 
 dmo secondo, 
 
 
 Novantesimo, 
 
 ninetieth. 
 
 Dedmo terzo, 
 
 thirteenth. 
 
 Centesimo, 
 
 hundredth. 
 
 Dedmo quarto, 
 
 fourteenth. 
 
 Millesimo, 
 
 thousandth. 
 
 Dedmo quinto, 
 
 fifteenth. 
 
 
 
64 NUMERALS. 
 
 161. Mille has the plural mila. 
 
 162. We cannot say in Italian, undid cento, dodici 
 cento, &c. ; but mille e cento, mille e due cento, &c. 
 
 163. The ordinal number placed after the name of so- 
 vereigns to indicate the order of succession has no article 
 before it as in English ; Leone decimo (Leo the Tenth). 
 
 164. After 21, 31, 41, 51, &c., the substantive qual- 
 ified by these numbers is singular ; Vent' un franco, trent 1 
 un franco, &c. It seems in such cases that the plurality 
 of twenty is unnoticed, and that the substantive is made 
 to agree with the singular number uno. 
 
 165. In multiplication we may say quattro volte quattro 
 fanno sedici, or quattro via quattro sedici (four times four 
 
 make sixteen). 
 
 166. Li is used very frequently instead of the article 
 gli before the cardinal number indicating the day of the 
 month; Partiremo li died (we shall set out on the tenth). 
 Observe that on is not translated into Italian. 
 
 167. Both is translated by tutti due, or tutti e due, as 
 I wish them both (li voglio tutti e due), when it is re- 
 ferred to two nouns, but by e . . . e when referred to two 
 sentences ; I shall go there both to-morrow and next 
 day (vi andro e domani e Valtro). 
 
 168. By twos, by threes, by fours, are translated by 
 a due, a tre, a quattro. Two by two, three by three (a 
 due a due, a tre a tre). 
 
 169. The adjective same is often elegantly translated 
 by uno (one). All lead to the same end (tutti tirano ad 
 unfine). 
 
 170. When we speak of the hour of the day, we say 
 e la una (it is one o'clock), scno le due (it is two o'clock), 
 sono le tre (it is three o'clock), &c. 
 
 171. It is immaterial whether the substantive be placed 
 
NUMERALS. 65 
 
 after or before the Cardinal number ; as, anni venti cinque, 
 or venti cinque anni (twenty-five years). 
 
 172. We cannot say two and thirty, three and thirty, 
 &c. ; but only thirty-two, thirty-three (trenta due, trenta 
 tre), &c. 
 
 173. In early times, the Italians began to count 
 the hours from one sunset to another. One o'clock was 
 the first hour after the setting of the sun, and the twenty- 
 fourth hour the one immediately before. It is still cus- 
 tomary in some parts of Italy to say, le ventitre, le venti- 
 quattro, as a convenient way to express one or two hours 
 before dusk. 
 
 174. Una decina, una dozzina, una quindicina, una 
 rentina, una trentina, una quarantina, un centinajo, un 
 migliajo, are collective substantives derived from the nu- 
 merical adjectives. 
 
 175; This day week, this day fortnight, are translated 
 by 6ggi a otto, oggi a quindici. 
 
 176. Per uno means for each person. II pranzo ci 
 e costato cinque franchi per uno (the dinner cost us five 
 francs a-piece). 
 
 177. In speaking of the different centuries of our liter- 
 ature, the thirteenth century is called il dugento, the four- 
 teenth il trecento, the fifteenth il quattrocento, and so on. 
 
 178. And is not used in notation, as in the following 
 and similar phrases : In the year one thousand eight 
 hundred and fifty-one (neW anno rnille ottocento cinquan- 
 tuno). 
 
 PRONOUNS. 
 
 179. The definition generally given of a pronoun is 
 correct, namely, that it is a word used instead of a 
 noun ; but the application of this definition is confined to 
 
66 PRONOUNS. 
 
 the class of Personal pronouns. These have already been 
 spoken of. 
 
 180. There are two other kinds of pronouns, viz. 
 Relative and the Adjective pronouns, which are, properly 
 speaking, either adjectives or articles , though some of 
 them are nouns. 
 
 181. Relative pronouns are such as relate in general 
 to some word or phrase going before, thence called the 
 Antecedent They are, who, which, and what. Example : 
 u The man is happy who lives virtuously" (Vuomo il 
 quote vive virtuosamente e felice)* 
 
 182. What is a kind of compound relative, including 
 both the antecedent and the relative, and is equivalent to 
 that which: as, u This is what I wanted," that is to say, 
 " the thing which I wanted." It is translated in Italian 
 by Quel che or do che, or la cosa die ; Questo e QUEL CHE 
 voglio, or cib CHE voglio ; or Questa e la COSA CHE voglio. 
 
 183. Who is applied to persons, which to things and 
 irrational animals. This distinction is not found in the 
 Italian language. 
 
 184. That as a relative is often used to prevent the 
 too frequent repetition of who and which. It is applied 
 to both persons and things, and is translated by Che. 
 He that acts wisely, &c. (colui CHE agisce saviamente). 
 
 185. Who, which, and what, are called Interrogatives 
 when they are used in asking questions, and are trans- 
 lated respectively by chi, quale, and che. 
 
 186. The word that is sometimes a relative, sometimes 
 
 * The relative pronouns may be called Conjunctive Adjectives, 
 as they fulfil the office of a conjunction in joining one proposition 
 to another, and in a certain manner make the proposition which 
 follows them equivalent to an adjective, as when we say, the king 
 who is just (il re che e giusto), which is the same as the just king 
 (il re giitsto). 
 
PRONOUNS. 67 
 
 a conjunction, and sometimes a demonstrative pronoun. 
 When it is a demonstrative pronoun, it is translated by 
 quetto* 
 
 187. The adjective pronouns are subdivided into four 
 kinds : namely, possessive, distributive, demonstrative, and 
 indefinite. 
 
 188. The possessive pronouns are those which relate 
 to possession or property. In English they are seven in 
 number : my, thy, his, her, our, your, their. In Italian 
 there are only six : mio, tuo, suo, nostro, vostro, loro. 
 
 189. The possessive pronouns, being adjectives, agree 
 in gender and number with the substantive ; but mio, tuo, 
 and suo, are irregular in their masculine plural, which is 
 miei, tuoi, suoi. 
 
 190. Loro is unchangeable, being alike in the mas- 
 culine and feminine, singular and plural. 
 
 191. The distributive pronouns are those which, taken 
 separately, denote the persons or things that make up a 
 number. They are, each (ciascuno), every (ogni), either 
 (1'uno o Taltro). 
 
 192. The demonstrative pronouns are those which point 
 out precisely the subjects to which they relate : in Eng- 
 lish there are two, this and that. This refers to the nearer 
 person or thing, that to the more distant.-j- 
 
 * The student will observe that the word that is a relative pro- 
 noun when it can be turned into who or which, a demonstrative 
 pronoun when it is immediately followed by a noun to which it 
 refers or is joined, and a conjunction in all other cases. 
 
 t The demonstrative pronouns perform the same office as the 
 article, namely, they limit the extension of the noun ; as, / like 
 books, I like this book, I like the look. In the first example, I mean 
 books in general; in the second and third, one particular book. 
 Hence the correct denomination of these words should be that of 
 demonstrative articles. 
 
68 PRONOUNS. 
 
 193. This is translated by questo, and that by quello. 
 But when the person or thing is near, or belongs or re- 
 fers to the person spoken to, cotesto is used; as, What 
 coat is that which you have on ? (che abito e COTESTO 
 che avete inddsso f) What words are these that you say ? 
 (che parole sono COTESTE che dite ?) 
 
 194. The indefinite pronouns are those which express 
 subjects in an indefinite or general manner; as, some 
 (qualche), other (altro), any (alcuno), one (uno), all (tut- 
 to\ &c. These are either adjectives or nouns. 
 
 GENERAL OBSERVATIONS ON THE ITALIAN PRONOUNS. 
 
 195. Che after a semicolon, colon, or period, always 
 means because. It is sometimes accented when used in 
 this manner : Placati : CHE altrimenti, &c. (be appeased : 
 because otherwise). 
 
 196. Che is used in some exclamatory expressions 
 with the imperative, and seems to add force to such sen- 
 tences : Che benedetta sia Vora (blessed be the hour) ; che 
 sifaccia (let it be done). The verb voglio (I wish) is un- 
 derstood before such phrases. 
 
 197. Non che is elegantly used instead of non solo (not 
 only). Petrarch says, Spero trovar pietd, NON CHE per- 
 dono (I hope to find pity, not pardon only). 
 
 198. Che as a conjunction may be understood : Voglio 
 mi diciate (I wish that you would tell me). 
 
 199. Che is used as a substantive, and means which 
 thing ; II che non e vero (which thing is not true).* 
 
 200. The books you bought, should be translated by 
 / libri che compraste. A most important rule in render- 
 
 * Alcun die is the same as alcuna cosa (something). 
 
PRONOUNS. 69 
 
 ing English into Italian is to supply all the words under- 
 stood in English, unless we know that such words may 
 also be omitted in the Italian. 
 
 201. Che used with non means but or only. Non hanno 
 che un libro (they have but one book). 
 
 202. Che is used for since. E molto tempo che son 
 qui (I have been here a long time). 
 
 203. Che means so that. Chi lo legherd CUE non si 
 sciolga ? (who will tie him so that he may not release 
 himself?) 
 
 204. Che may be used for affinche (in order to). 
 Guardava d'intorno dove si potesse porre CHE non si 
 bagnasse (he looked round where he might place him- 
 self in order that he might not become wet). 
 
 205. Non ho CHE fare means I have nothing to do. 
 
 206. Che che means whatever. Che che avvenga (what- 
 ever may happen). 
 
 207. Lest is translated by che non. Do not give him 
 so much money lest he abuse it (non gli date tanto danaro 
 CHE NON ne abusi). 
 
 208. Che is used with piu and meno. Piu che (more 
 than) ; meno che (less than). (See Section 128). 
 
 209. Che is often used as an expletive after an inter- 
 jection; Ahi! CHE sono per duto (Alas! I am lost). 
 
 210. In exclamatory sentences, What a man! what a 
 woman! the indefinite article a is omitted. What a 
 man ! (che uomo !) what a woman ! (che donna /) 
 
 211. What? in interrogative sentences is translated 
 by che ? or che cosa ? (what thing ?) or cosa alone. Che 
 dite ? or che cosa dite 1 or cosa dite ? (what do you say ?) 
 
 212. Che is used for quel che (that which or what); 
 Non so che dite (I do not know what you say). 
 
70 PRONOUNS. 
 
 CHI. 
 
 213. Chi is always singular. It means, 
 
 1 . Who is the person that ? 
 
 2. The person who. 
 
 3. Some persons. 
 
 1. Chiparlaf (who speaks?) 
 
 2. Chi lo dice ha ragione (he who says so is right). 
 
 3. In questo mondo chi piange e chi ride (in this world 
 
 some weep and some laugh). 
 
 GUI. 
 
 214. Speaking of persons, cui is used in the genitive, 
 dative, or ablative case more commonly than che. 
 L'uomo DI cui parlate (the man of whom you speak). 
 Speaking of things, che may be used in all cases. 
 
 215. Cui should always be used for che when the latter 
 might create obscurity. The man whom my father loved, 
 is better translated by I'uomo cuiamava mio padre than by 
 Vuomo che, &c. Owing to the nominative coming so fre- 
 quently after the verb in Italian, the second example might 
 be understood to signify The man who loved my father. 
 
 216. Cui is sometimes used between the article and 
 its substantive, and then means di cui ; as, // cui valore 
 (the valour of whom, or whose valour). 
 
 217. Quale means come in comparison, and is followed 
 by tale. Dante says, QUALE ijioretti dal notturno gelo 
 chinati e chiusi, poiche il sol gl'imbianca, si drizzan tutti 
 aperti in loro stelo ; TAL mi fec'io di mia virtute stanca. 
 (As flowerets, by the nightly chilness bended down and 
 closed, erect themselves all open on their stems when the 
 sun whitens them, thus I did with my fainting courage). 
 Dr Cartyle's Translation. 
 
 218. Quale means whoever, whatever, or whichsoever. 
 
PRONOUNS, 71 
 
 Qual dl lassu discende (whoever descends from above) ; 
 Qual si sia la cagione (whatever may be the cai^se) ; 
 Qual volete di questi due libri f (which of these two books 
 do you wish ?) 
 
 219. Quale in the above signification is often joined to 
 32 sia or si voglia, as qualsisia or qualsivoglia ; plural, 
 qualsisiano and qualsivogliano. 
 
 220. Quale is used in the singular in the sense of some 
 persons. Quale se ne ando in campagna, e qual quci e 
 qual Id (Some persons went into the country, and some 
 here and some there). 
 
 221. Quale is used as well as che in expressions of 
 doubt. Non so qual cosa, or che, mi tenga dot, &c. (I do 
 not know what keeps me from, &c.) 
 
 222. Quale is used in the same way in interjections. 
 Quale amore, qual ricchezza, qual parentela ! or Che 
 amore, che richezza, die parentela ! (What love, what 
 wealth, what parentage!) 
 
 223. Tale e quale means " exactly such." 
 
 224. Cotale is the same as tale (such). How can you 
 say such a thing? (Come potete dire una tal cosa, or una 
 cotal cosa ?) 
 
 225. I. Onde means " of whom or which." L'uomo 
 onde si parla (the man of whom one speaks). 
 
 226. II. Onde expresses also the things with which. 
 Conviene che mi guadagni con fatica ONDE vivo ONDE 
 vesto (I must gain with difficulty the means by which 
 I live and dress). 
 
 227. III. Onde means " so that." Comincia apiovere 
 ONDE e meglio che torni a casa (It begins to rain, so that 
 I had better return home). 
 
 228. IV. Onde has also the signification of in thai 
 
72 PRONOUNS. 
 
 place, whither : La ONDE io vado non c'e (it is not in the 
 place, to which I am going). 
 
 229. Y. Onde and donde mean whence. Non so ONDE 
 or DONDE veniate (I do not know whence you come).* 
 
 POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 230. The possessive pronouns are, 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Masculine and Feminine. Masculine and Feminine. 
 
 Mio, mia, my, mine. Miei, mie, my, mine. 
 
 Tuo, tua, thy, thine. Tuoi, tue, thy, thine. 
 
 Suo, sua, his, her. Suoi, sue, his, her. 
 
 Nostro, nostra, our. Nostri, nostre, our. 
 
 Vostro, vostra, your. Vostri, vostre, your. 
 
 Loro, their. Loro, their. 
 
 231. The possessive pronoun agrees with the thing 
 possessed, and not with the possessor. Mary sold her 
 ring (Maria ha venduto il suo anello). 
 
 232. The possessive pronoun is preceded by an article 
 when agreeing with a substantive expressed or under- 
 stood. II mio panno (my cloth) ; Questo panno e IL MIO 
 (this cloth is mine). 
 
 233. It must be observed that there is a difference be- 
 tween questo panno e mio, and questo panno e il mio, cor- 
 responding to the difference between this cloth is mine and 
 this is my cloth. 
 
 234. The article is omitted before possessive pronouns 
 agreeing with a substantive expressing relationship or 
 
 * It will be observed that this word has very different significa- 
 tions^ according to which it forms a different part of speech. It has 
 been thought more convenient to state all that was essential to be 
 known about such words when they first occur, than to introduce 
 the observations under various heads. 
 
PRONOUNS. 73 
 
 dignity, but never if a word comes between them, or 
 if the possessive pronouns are in the plural or before 
 loro. 
 
 Ecco miofratello (here is my brother). 
 
 Ecco il mio carofratello (here is my dear brother). 
 
 Ecco il lorofratello (here is their brother). 
 
 Ecco i mieifratelli (here are my brothers). 
 
 235. Though mio before fratello has no article, as in 
 the first of the above examples, the article may be used 
 to add force, and we may sometimes say emphatically 
 ecco IL miofratello. 
 
 236. Some familiar expressions for relations, such as 
 mamma and its diminutives, require an article before the 
 possessive. La mia mamma (my mamma) ; La mia sorel- 
 lina (my little sister). 
 
 237. They are sisters of mine, they are friends of his, 
 should be translated by sono mie sorelle, sono suoi amid; 
 but these are my sisters, these are my friends, are trans- 
 lated by queste sono le mie sorelle, questi sono i miei amid. 
 
 238. When the meaning of what we say is perfectly 
 clear, the possessive is often omitted. E partito colla 
 moglie, coi figli, e con tutta la famiglia (He went away 
 with his wife, his children, and all his family). 
 
 239. The possessive pronouns are used also as sub- 
 stantives. The sense supplies the meaning. Ha per- 
 duto il suo (he has lost his fortune) ; rivedro i miei (I 
 shall again see my relations) ; // capitano si ritirb co' suoi 
 (the captain retired with his men). 
 
 240. The personal noun in the dative is very often 
 substituted for the possessive pronoun. Thus, instead of 
 saying he is Hot my father (egli non e MIO padre), the 
 Italians prefer saying egli non MI e padre. This is par- 
 ticularly the case in speaking of the various parts of 
 
74 PRONOUNS. 
 
 the body or of dress. Eccovi il fazzotetto (here is your 
 handkerchief) ; Se lo pose sulle ginocchia (he put it upon 
 his knees). 
 
 241. It is immaterial whether we say un mio amico (a 
 friend of mine), or uno del miei amid (one of my friends). 
 
 242. Sometimes we use the personal pronoun instead 
 of the possessive, to prevent obscurity : as^ Caesar loves 
 his brother and his sons (Cesare ama suo fratello ed i 
 figli DI LUI). 
 
 243. When own is added to the possessive pronoun, 
 it may be omitted, or translated by proprio. She wrote 
 that letter with her own hand (Scrisse quella lettera di 
 suopugno, or disuo PROPRIO pugno, or dipnftpRiopugno). 
 
 244. One's own is translated by .proprio when used 
 generally. To confess one's own sins is a mark, &c. (11 
 confessare i PR6PRI peccati e segno, &c.) 
 
 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 245. The Italians have three demonstrative pronouns ; 
 questo (this), quello (that), and cotesto, the meaning of 
 which cannot be expressed by a single word in English. 
 It is used when we speak of any person or thing refer- 
 ring, belonging, or near to the person spoken to. Cotesto 
 vestito vi va bene (that coat fits you well) ; Che parole sono 
 coteste? (what words are those of yours?) 
 
 246. Questo is often employed as an expletive with 
 oggi (to-day). Thus we say oggi or quest' oggi non esco 
 (I do not go out to-day). 
 
 247. Mane and mattina (morning), sera (evening), 
 notte (night), are joined to questa, and form the adverbs 
 stamanej st'amattina^ stasera, stanotte. 
 
PRONOUNS. 7 5 
 
 248. Codesto, codesti, may be used instead of cotesto, 
 cotesti. 
 
 249. From cotesto we have derived the adverbs costa 
 and costij meaning the place where the person addressed 
 is. 
 
 250. Costl is used for a definite spot ; costa is a more 
 general expression. This distinction is also found be- 
 tween qui and qua (here), II and Id (there). 
 
 251. In questo, in questa, in quello, in quella, mean 
 on this or on that time or occasion. Tempo is under- 
 stood with questo and quello, and ora with questa and 
 quella. In quella arrivarono due soldati (at that mo- 
 ment two soldiers arrived). 
 
 252. Costui, costei, costoro, mean this man, this 
 woman ; these men, these women. Colui, colei, coloro, 
 mean that man, that woman ; those men, those women. 
 
 253. Questi, cotesti, and qucgli, signify this or that 
 man, and are used only in the nominative singular. 
 Questi and quegli correspond to costui and colui ; Cotesti, 
 like cotesto, applied to an individual near the person 
 spoken to. 
 
 254. do has the same signification as questa, cotesta, 
 or quella cosa. Che vuol dir do ? (what does this 
 mean ?) 
 
 255. From do are derived doe (this is), ciocche (that 
 which), acciocclie (in order that), &c. 
 
 INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 OGNI, QUALUNQUE, CHIUNQUE, CIASCUNO, CI ASCII ED UNO. 
 
 256. Ogni signifies every, and is iised for the singu- 
 lar of both genders. The plural may be expressed by 
 
76 PRONOUNS. 
 
 tutti i or tutte le. Ogni giorno, ogni notte ; or tutti i 
 giorni or tutte le notti. 
 
 257. From ogni we form ognuno (every one), and 
 ognora (always). Ognora is rather poetical. 
 
 258. Every other day, every third day, every fort- 
 night, are rendered by ogni due giorni, ogni tre giorni, 
 ogni quindici giorni. 
 
 259. Qualunque persona is the same as ogni persona 
 che (every person that). 
 
 260. Chiunque is the same as qualunque uomo, or 
 ogni uomo che (every man that, or whoever). 
 
 261. Ciascuno and ciascheduno are the same as ognuno 
 (every one). The feminine is ciascuna, ciascheduna. 
 
 262. Each is translated by per uno in such phrases as 
 this : He gives each of us two apples (ci da due mele 
 per uno). 
 
 ALCUNO, QUALCHE, NESSUNO, NIUNO, VERUNO, NIENTE. 
 
 263. Alcuno signifies some, any. Avete alcuna diffi- 
 coltd ? (have you some or any difficulty?) Give me 
 
 'some books (datemi alcuni libri) ; I see some ladies 
 (vedo alcune signore). 
 
 264. The partitive article del, dei, delta, delle, &c., 
 should be used for some when, instead of number, we 
 
 speak of quantity. (See Section 42). Give me some 
 sugar (datemi del zuccliero}. 
 
 265. Alcuno with non after it is the same as nessuno* 
 Alcuno non vifu, or nessuno vifu (there was no one). 
 
 266. Qualche may be substituted for alcuno, but it 
 is always singular. Give me some apples (datemi alcune 
 mele, or qualche mela). 
 
 267. Nessuno, niuno, and veruno, signify no and no 
 one, being either adjectives or substantives. No one 
 
PRONOUNS. 77 
 
 knows it (nessuno, niuno, or veruno lo so) ; Nothing is 
 certain (nessuna cosa e certa). 
 
 268. When nessuno, niuno, veruno, and niente (nothing) 
 follow a verb, non (not) is always placed before it. Non 
 ho niente (I have nothing). 
 
 269. Nessuno, niuno, veruno, may signify alcwuo. 
 Piu veloce che nessun cavallo (swifter than any horse). 
 
 270. Niente and nulla are sometimes used for some- 
 thing. Se 20 possofar nulla per voi, commandatemi (if I 
 can do any thing for you, command me). 
 
 271. Niente and nulla may sometimes be expressed by 
 che. Chi e innocente non ha niente da temere ; or Chi e 
 innocente non ha che temere (he who is innocent has no- 
 thing to fear). 
 
 272. Nullo means null or void, and is then an adjec- 
 tive. Those laws were rendered null (quelle leggi furono 
 rese NULLE). 
 
 TUTTO. 
 
 273. Tutto (all) as a substantive, is generally without 
 an article. Tutto e finito (all is over) . // may be used for 
 greater emphasis. 
 
 274. Tutto che and con tutto che signify although. 
 
 275. All of us is translated by noi tutti or tutti noi. 
 
 276. Con tutto do, tuttavia, con tutto questo, signify 
 nevertheless. Al tutto, del tutto, at tutto e per tutto (en- 
 tirely) ; Per tutto, da per tutto (every where) ; Tutt' 
 altro (in a quite different manner) ; Tutt' or a (always) j 
 E tutt' uno (it is all one, the same). 
 
 277. Tutto quanto is more emphatical than tutto. Oggi 
 vi aspetto tutti quanti (to-day I expect you all) ; Tremava 
 tutta quanta (she trembled all over). 
 
78 PRONOUNS. 
 
 ALTRO, ALTBUI. 
 
 278. Altro means any thing else; Avete altrof (have 
 you any thing else ?) 
 
 279. Non e altro che means nothing else; Non fa 
 alfro che cica j are (she does nothing else but chatter). 
 
 280. Altro is often used for much more. C'e altro ! 
 (there is a great deal more !) 
 
 281. Per altro is used for however. Per altro e molto 
 avaro (however, he is very avaricious). 
 
 282. Otherwise is sometimes translated by altro. That 
 cannot be otherwise than useful to you (Non pud esservi 
 a'tro che utile). 
 
 283. Dotto quanto qualunque altro (as learned as any 
 other). Uomo (man) is understood after altro. 
 
 284. We say Chi altri? (who besides?) Nessun altro 
 (no one else). 
 
 285. Altri sometimes signifies some men. Altri cangia 
 il pelo prirna che i costumi ; some men change their hair 
 (become old) sooner than their customs. Altri is sin- 
 gular. 
 
 286. Altri in the plural is often an expletive. Noi 
 altri, voi altri, quelli altri (we, you y those). These ex- 
 pressions are very frequent. 
 
 287. Words derived from altro, altri: 
 
 1. Altramente, altramenti, altrimenti (otherwise). 
 
 2. Altresi (also). 
 
 3. Altretale or altrettale (the same). 
 
 4. Altrettanto (as much). 
 
 5. Altronde (from another part). 
 
 6. A trove (elsewhere). 
 
 288. Altrui is used in every case except the nominative 
 instead of altri. Pemoso piu d'altrui che di se (more 
 
PRONOUNS. 
 
 79 
 
 anxious about others than about himself) ; Uccide altrui 
 (he kills others). 
 
 289. L 'altrui cose is the same as the cose degli altri 
 (the things of others). L* altrui is also a substantive, 
 meaning the property of others. 
 
 290. Altrui is used by itself instead of of others. Beato 
 Vuomo die impara a spese altrui (happy is the man who 
 learns at the expense of others). 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 291. Prepositions, with the cases they govern.* 
 
 Accanto 
 
 Allato 
 
 Addosso 
 
 A fronte 
 
 A guisa 
 
 A modo 
 
 Anzi 
 
 Appetto 
 
 Appie 
 
 Appresso 
 
 A vanti 
 
 Circa 
 
 Contra 
 
 Contro 
 
 Dentro 
 
 Dietro 
 
 Dila 
 
 Di qua 
 
 Discosto 
 
 Dopo 
 
 Eccetto 
 
 Entro 
 
 Near by, at the side of, about Dat. Gen. 
 
 On, upon one's back, about, at Dat. 
 
 Opposite, over against Dat. Gen, 
 
 Like Gen. 
 
 Before 
 
 Opposite, in comparison with 
 
 At the foot 
 
 With, near, by, next 
 
 Before, in the presence of 
 
 About, concerning 
 
 Against, over against 
 
 Within 
 
 Behind 
 
 On that side ) 
 
 On this side f 
 
 Far 
 
 After 
 
 Except, but 
 
 Within, in 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Dat, Gen. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Ace. Gen. Dat. 
 
 Dat.Acc.Abl. 
 
 Ace. Dat. Gen. 
 
 Gen. Act. Dat. 
 
 Dat. Ace. 
 Dat.Acc.G.Abl. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 Abl. Dat. 
 Ace. Gen. Dat. 
 Ace. 
 Ace. Dat. 
 
 * The case first specified is the one most generally in use. 
 
80 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Fino, Sino 
 
 Fra, Tra 
 
 Fuori 
 
 Fuorche 
 
 In mezzo 
 
 Infuori 
 
 Intorno 
 
 Lunghesso \ A1 
 T y > Along, 
 
 Till, until, as far as, to Dat. Ace* 
 Within,between,besides, among Ace. 
 
 Beside, besides, out, outside Gen. Ace. 
 
 Except Ace. 
 
 In the middle Dat. Gen. Act. 
 
 Except, but, excepted Abl. 
 
 About, round about Dat. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Dat. Ace. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Dat. Gen. Ace. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Ace. Dat. 
 Dat. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Ace. Gen. 
 
 Ace. Gen. Dat. 
 
 Acc.Gen.D.Abl. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Ace. Gen. 
 
 Dat. Gen. 
 
 T 
 Lungo 
 
 Mediante 
 Oltre, oltra 
 Prima 
 Presso 
 quanta In 
 quanta 
 Rasente 
 Rimp'tto 
 Dinmpctto j 
 Salvo Except, but, save 
 
 Secondo According to 
 Senza Without 
 
 Sopra, sovra On, upon, by 
 Sotto Under 
 
 Su, Su per Upon, on 
 Verso Towards, to 
 
 Vicino Near 
 
 Through, by means of, for 
 
 Beyond, besides 
 
 Before 
 
 Near, almost 
 
 Asi 
 
 Close to 
 
 Over against, opposite 
 
 292. Infuori is placed after the case it governs : as, 
 Da voi infuori (except you). 
 
 293. Salvo and vicino may be declined. Examples : 
 Perdemmo tutto salvo, or salva, la vita (we lost every 
 thing but life). 
 
PREPOSITIONS. 81 
 
 294. Di (of) is the sign of the genitive. It expresses 
 principally possession and derivation. H nome di Maria 
 (Mary's name) ; Ilfiglio di Carlo (Charles' son). 
 
 295. When the preposition is a mere sign to indicate 
 relation between other words, and without any distinct 
 meaning attached to it, di should be used. Temo DI 
 perdere (I fear to lose). 
 
 296. With after an adjective or participle is translated 
 by di. Armed with swords (armati DI spado). 
 
 297. Di is often used with an adjective, forming an 
 adverb. Di subito or subitqmente (suddenly) ; di certo 
 (certainly) ; di soverchio (excessively) ; di nascosto (se- 
 cretly). 
 
 298. Di tempo in tempo means from time to time. Di 
 venti in trenta anni (from twenty to thirty years). 
 
 299. Di is often an expletive ; as, 
 Dir DI si (to say yes). 
 
 Dir DI no (to say no). 
 Credo DI si (I think so). 
 Credo DI no (I think not). 
 Prima DI voi (before you). 
 Dopo DI voi (after you). 
 Andar Difuori (to go outside). 
 Andar DI dentro (to go within). 
 Andar DI sopra (to go above). 
 Andar DI sotto (to go below). 
 Andar DI su (to go up stairs). 
 Andar DI giu (to go down stairs). 
 
 300. Di su, di giu, &c., may become nouns with an 
 article before them. II di su (the upper part) ; II di giu 
 (the lower part). 
 
82 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 301. We say often quel Hrbante DI Cdlandrino (that 
 rogue Calandrini) ; Quello sciocco di Giovanni (that 
 foolish man, John), &c. 
 
 302. Di has often the sense of the partitive article. 
 Give me some of that wine (dammi DI quel vino}* 
 
 303. Various English prepositions are sometimes trans- 
 lated by di. 
 
 304. I. In. He is the greatest man in London (e il 
 piu grand' uomo di Londrd). 
 
 305. II. As, or in regard to. Gid vecchio d'anni, ma 
 giovanissimo di senno (already old as to years, but very 
 young as to wisdom). 
 
 306. III. For. Pianse di dolcezza (she wept for joy). 
 
 307. IV. From. Divenuto principe di richissimo ne- 
 goziante (from being a very rich merchant having become 
 a prince). 
 
 308. V. From (da). Silevo di capo la corona (he took 
 the crown from his head) ; Parti di Palermo (he departed 
 from Palermo). 
 
 309. VI. About. Parleremo di questo (we shall speak 
 about this). 
 
 310. VII. To. She is sister to Lord D. ; which is 
 the way to London? (E sorella DI Lord D.; quale e la 
 strada DI Londra ?} 
 
 311. VIII. During. Andar DI giorno (to go during 
 the day). 
 
 A. 
 
 312. A is used exactly as the two English prepositions 
 tOj at, and shows the point to which an action is directed. 
 
 * Un poco (a little) is always understood before a partitive ar- 
 ticle. Dammi DI quel vino, dammi DEL zucchero,\s used for the sake 
 of brevity, instead of dammi UN POCO DI quel vino, dammi UN POCO DEL 
 zucchero (give me a little of that wine, a small quantity of sugar). 
 
PREPOSITIONS. 83 
 
 Andiamo a pranzo (let us go to dinner). Look at me 
 (guardate a me). A is followed by d before a vowel. 
 Andiamo ad Anversa (let us go to Antwerp). 
 
 313. A is often used instead of con (with], as, rimase A 
 occhi bassi, A bocca aperta (he remained with his eyes 
 cast down, with his mouth open) ; Parlor e a stento (to 
 speak with difficulty). 
 
 314. I am going home is translated by vado A CAS A ; 
 he is not at home (non IN CASA). 
 
 315. To take k /row every one is translated by togliere 
 A ciascuno. 
 
 316. Observe the translation of in by a in such phrases 
 as, If you come to the theatre you will find me in the first 
 tier (Se venite al teatro mi troverete al primo or dine ;) I 
 reside in London (dimoro A Londra). 
 
 317. In English, a noun may be qualified by another 
 noun prefixed to it, in the same manner as by an adjec- 
 tive. In Italian, the qualifying noun preceded by a (to), 
 di (of), or da (from), is placed after the noun qualified. 
 
 1. A windmill; un molino a vento (a mill moved by 
 the wind). 
 
 2. A gold ring ; an anello d'oro (material). 
 
 3. A bedroom ; camera DA letto (use). 
 
 DA (from or by]. 
 
 318. This preposition, besides the signification of from 
 or by, has several others, some of which could with diffi- 
 culty be expressed by other words. The student should 
 make himself thoroughly acquainted with the following 
 examples, which illustrate the various uses of this pre- 
 position, and commit them to memory. 
 
 319. I. Z)& before (<mm&*). L'hovedutospessopassare 
 da casa mia (I saw him often pass before my house). 
 
84 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 320. II. Da = (about) circa; Uscirono da dodici sol- 
 dati (there came out about twelve soldiers). 
 
 321. III. Da= (since). Da quel tempo sono sempre stato 
 disgraziato (since that time I have always been unhappy). 
 
 322. IV. Da = becoming, fit for (conveniente, appro- 
 priate a}. Sono gioje DA donne (these are jewels for 
 women) ; Non sono cose DA lui (these are not things fit 
 for him). 
 
 323. V. Da, before a town, means born in. E da 
 Firenze (he was born in Florence). Speaking of countries 
 di is used ; e di Toscana (he was born in Tuscany). 
 
 324. VI. Da followed by a means between. Voglio 
 parlargli DA SOLO A SOLO (I wish to speak to him pri- 
 vately, i. e. between ourselves] . We say also a quattro occhi. 
 
 325. VII. Da = to (a), or at the house of (a casa). 
 Venite da me (come to me, or to my house}. 
 
 326. VIII. Z>a = as, come. Ti giuro, DA galantuomo 
 (I swear to you as an honest man). 
 
 327. IX. Da = to be used for. Andiamo nella sola 
 DA mangiare, nella camera DA letto (let us go into the 
 dining-room, into the bedroom). 
 
 328. X. Da = something for. Datemi da mangiare 
 (give me something to eat, or for eating) ; Datemi da 
 scrivere (give me something for writing, or writing ma- 
 terials). 
 
 329. XI. Da = through, (per], PasseremovA Milano 
 (we shall pass through Milan). 
 
 330. XII. Da = having, or who has. In this case 
 the article is always affixed to it. Uuomo dal nero vestito 
 (the man who has the black dress). This construction, 
 however, is borrowed from the Greek, and is little used 
 except in poetry. We should rather say vestito di nero 
 (dressed in black). 
 
PREPOSITIONS. 85 
 
 331. XIII. Da = towards, on. Andate DA quella 
 parte (go on that side). 
 
 332. XIV. Da often serves to form adverbial ex- 
 pressions. Dite davvero f (do you speak seriously f) 
 
 333. XY. Da also forms a kind of adjective when 
 followed by the noun bene. Un uomo da bene or dabbene 
 is the same as un buon uomo. 
 
 334. XVI. Da may signify alone. Vi andrb da me 
 (I shall go there alone]. 
 
 335. XVII. By is translated by da in all cases in 
 which it does not signify by the means of. It is then 
 translated by con. 
 
 836. Per means not only for, but also through. Sono 
 andato vagandoper lo mondo sette anni (I went wandering 
 through the w r orld seven years). 
 
 337. Per means during (durante). Vi starb per un 
 mese (I will stay there during a month). 
 
 338. To, meaning in order to, is translated by per. 
 I came to speak to you (sono venuto PER parlarvi]. 
 
 339. Per is often followed by lo instead of il. Per lo 
 mondo (through the world). 
 
 340. Per giorno, per uomo, signify every day, for 
 every man. Bevo un bicchiere di vino PER GIORNO (I 
 drink a glass of wine a-day or each day) Ho dato due 
 scudi PER UOMO (I have given two crowns to every man). 
 A testa is the same as per uomo. 
 
 341. Per tempo means early. Other adverbs are 
 formed with per, as per accidente (accidentally, &c.) 
 
 342. Per grande che fosse, per quanto faccia, signify 
 however great he might be, whatever he might do. 
 
 343. Per mare e per terra means by sea and by land ; 
 
86 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Per Dio, for the sake of God ; Essere per affbgare means 
 to be near, on the point of being drowned ; Nonfa per te 
 (it is not becoming, it is not for thee). 
 
 344. In is the same as in English. Sometimes it in 
 used for su. Mettetevi il cappello IN capo (put your hat 
 on your head). The preposition into is wanting in Italian. 
 II Tamigi mettefoce, or sbocca, IN mare (the Thames flows 
 INTO the sea). 
 
 su. 
 
 345. Su means sometimes towards, near (verso, mcino]. 
 Sulfar del giorno (towards or near the break of day). 
 
 FRA Or TRA. 
 
 346. Fra or tra (between). Fra poco, fra un ora, 
 signify in a little, in an hour ; fra not (among ourselves). 
 
 347. We meet sometimes fra and tra joined to the 
 articles, as tral, among the. 
 
 ADVERBS. 
 
 348. Adverbs may be formed from all adjectives, by 
 adding the substantive mente to them. Vi parlo CHIARA- 
 MENTE (I speak to you clearly]. 
 
 349. The substantive mente is feminine. The adjective 
 must agree with it. If it ends in o, it is changed into a 
 (cMaramente) ; if in e, it is not changed. Scrive elegante- 
 mente (he writes elegantly]. If in le or re, the e is cut 
 off. Fedelmente (faithfully; ) superiormente (in a superior 
 manner). 
 
 350. Many adjectives are used as adverbs without anv 
 change. Vi parlo chiaro (I speak to you clearly]. There 
 is no rule for pointing out those that may be so used, 
 
87 
 
 OBSERVATIONS ON SOME ADVERBS AND CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 351. Pure (yet) is often used after an imperative to 
 express concession. Posso andarmene? andate PURE. 
 (may I go? you may go). 
 
 352. Pure sometimes means also. Verrete voi PURE 
 (you will come also]. 
 
 353. Neppure (ne pure) means not even. Neppure 
 una volta (not even once). 
 
 354. Pure means also solamente (only). Gid pur pen- 
 sandoj &c. (already in thinking only, &c.) 
 
 355. Pure is joined to other words. Neppure (not 
 even) ; eppure (and yet) ; oppure (or yet) ; purche (pro- 
 vided, &c.) 
 
 356. Pur troppo means " but too much so." E pur 
 troppo vero (it is but too true). 
 
 357. Pure is often an expletive. Ed e pur vero! 
 (and it is indeed true !) 
 
 358. Vie or via are used before piit and meno instead 
 of molto or assai. E vie piu bella, or via piu bella di voi 
 (she is much more beautiful than you). 
 
 359. Assai means either enough or much. The stu- 
 dent should rather use alibastanza for enough, and molto 
 for much. 
 
 360. Or ora means, like "just now' 7 in English, either 
 a very short time before or after the present moment. 
 Verrb or ora, L'ho veduto or ora (I shall come just now, 
 I have seen him.. just now]. 
 
 361. Di Id means in the next room. C'e di Id ilsarto 
 (the tailor is in the next room) ; Chi e di Id f (who is 
 there ?) Al di Id means beyond ; E riuscito al di Id delle 
 sue speranze (he succeeded beyond his hopes). ' 
 
 362. Time, meaning the repetition of any action, is 
 
88 ADVERBS AND CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 rendered by volta, not tempo. Once, twice, three times 
 (una volta, due volte, tre volte]. 
 
 363. Ago is translated either \>yfa, which is unchange- 
 able, or by essere, which agrees with the noun. A year 
 ago, two years ago, three years ago (e un anno, sono due 
 anni, or due anni sono, sono tre anni, or tre anni sono ; and 
 also un anno fa, due anni fa, tre anni fa, &c.) 
 
 364. Ci and Vi are employed for here and there when 
 the place spoken of has been previously mentioned ; but 
 strictly speaking they still preserve their original signi- 
 fication of in it, to it, in them, to them. 
 
 365. Non che means not only ; anzi means nay, on the 
 contrary. Mica , punto p gid are used to give more force 
 to a negation : Non credo mica, non credo punto, non 
 credo gid (I do not believe indeed). 
 
 366. Gid gid is more forcible than gid alone. E gid 
 gid mezzo finito (it is already half finished). From gid 
 we derive giacche (since). Forseforse is used as gid gid, 
 as more expressive than forse ; so also punto punto and 
 a few other words. 
 
 367. Old signifies already or formerly; it is some- 
 times an expletive ; it may also stand for of course. 
 
 L'ho Gi&fatto (I have done it already). 
 Ebbi GIA un amico (I had formerly a friend). 
 Non e GIA un codardo (he is not certainly a coward). 
 Lof arete? GIA (will you do it? Of course). 
 
 368. How is translated by quanto when there is an 
 exclamation. How cruel he was ! (quanto erafiero!) 
 
 369. Then is differently translated according to its 
 different meanings. 
 
 1. At that time (Allora). 
 
 2. Afterwards (Poi). 
 
 3. Therefore (Quindi). 
 
ADVERBS AND CONJUNCTIONS. 89 
 
 370. Rather may be translated by anzi die no. They 
 are rather beautiful (sono belle ANZI CHE NO). 
 
 371. Quando and ove are used for se with a verb in 
 the subjunctive mood. Quando vogliate, ove vogliate (if 
 you wished). 
 
 372. Quando, quand'anche, quando ancora, quando 
 pure, benche, sebbene, quantunque. All mean although, 
 and require the verb in the subjunctive mood. 
 
 373. Perche has various significations. 
 
 1. Perche andate via ? (why do you go away ?) 
 
 2. Perche ho voglia di andar via (because I wish to go 
 away). 
 
 3. Non vi ho dato il danaro perche lo spendiate subito 
 (I did not give you the money in order that you should 
 spend it immediately). 
 
 4. Non lasciavamo d'andare, perche parlasse (we did 
 not cease to go, though he spoke). This use of perche 
 is not so common as the others. 
 
 5. La finestra era molto alta da terra, perche come la 
 donna cadde subitamente morl (the window was very high 
 from the ground, so that when the woman fell she died 
 suddenly). 
 
 374. Perche as a substantive signifies the reason. 
 Ditemi il perche (tell me the reason). 
 
 375. Nothing but is translated by se non, altro che, or 
 altra cosa che. My master does nothing but scold (il 
 mio maestro non fa ALTRO CHE sgridare). 
 
90 
 
 MOODS AND TENSES. 
 
 376. The passive verbs in Italian, as in English, are 
 always expressed by the verb essere (to be), followed by 
 the past participle of the active verbs. Amare (to love), 
 essere amato (to be loved). 
 
 377. The principal moods are the Infinitive, Indicative, 
 Conditional, Imperative, and Subjunctive. 
 
 378. The following tenses have particular terminations 
 by which they are easily known : * 
 
 1. Present indicative. 
 
 2. Past imperfect indicative. 
 
 3. Past perfect indicative. 
 
 4. Future indicative. 
 
 5. Future conditional. 
 
 6. Present imperative. 
 
 7. Present subjunctive. 
 
 8. Past imperfect. 
 
 379. The past imperfect indicates a past action in an 
 imperfect manner ; that is, without stating precisely the 
 point or time of its cessation. This is done in two ways : 
 1. Without any reference to another past action. When 
 I was a boy I was (or used to be) thought very clever 
 (quando ero ragazzo ero stimato molto ingegnoso). 2. 
 Showing its continuation after the cessation of another 
 action. When she came into my room, I was reading 
 (quando entrb nella mia camera io leggeva, or stava leg- 
 gendo). My action of reading might have continued after 
 the other action of entering the room was finished. 
 
 380. The use of the imperfect is very difficult to Eng- 
 lish students, both in the study of French and Italian. 
 The French and the Italians have acquired such a facility 
 in distinguishing the perfect and imperfect tenses, that 
 
 * For the sake of brevity, the future of the conditional will be 
 called Conditional, and the present of the imperative the Imperative. 
 
MOODS AND TENSES. 91 
 
 even without thinking they are sure to be correct. The 
 English student can only hope to succeed by great atten- 
 tion and long practice. The following practical rules 
 may be useful to him : 1. Use rather the perfect than 
 the imperfect when you are uncertain. 2. Never use 
 the imperfect unless you can express the past tense in 
 English by " I used to," " I was." I used to be thought (ero 
 stimato] ; I was reading (to leggeva, or stava leggendo]. 
 
 381. The Italians give to the past imperfect the name 
 of Pendente, from pendere (to hang, to be in suspense). 
 
 382. When an action is considered as entirely past, it 
 may have finished either lately, or for some time, or for 
 a time not specified. When the action has taken place 
 lately, the tense is called Past determinate, and is ex- 
 pressed by the present of the compound tenses. Sono 
 stato al teatro ed ho veduto V opera nuova (I went lately 
 to the theatre and have seen (saw) the new opera). 
 
 383. When the action has happened for some time, or 
 for a time not specified, the past is called Undeterminate. 
 lofui in Parigi e vi conobbi molti valenti uomini (I was in 
 Paris and knew there many worthy men). The preterite 
 expresses such an action. 
 
 384. There are two other past tenses which denote an 
 action PAST FOR A LONG TIME, and differing from each 
 other in the same way as the imperfect does from the 
 perfect. The first is called Trapassato Imperfetto, and 
 the second, Trapassato Perfetto. Trapassato means past 
 for a long time. Example of the first : lo aveva veduto 
 in Milano, &c. (I had seen in Milan, &c.) ; second, Come 
 to ebbi udito ilfatto I (as I had heard the fact). 
 
 385. The future tense is either imperfect or perfect. 
 The imperfect merely expresses the future in a general 
 way. Amero (I shall love). The second future, the per- 
 
92 MOODS AND TENSES. 
 
 feet, expresses the future action in a more certain manne 
 as, Avro amato (I shall have loved). This future is 
 in reference to another action. Quando tornerb in Italia, 
 sard gia invecchiato (when I shall return to Italy, I shall 
 have already grown old). 
 
 386. The imperative has two tenses, the present and 
 the future. Present, va su (go up) ; future, prenderai 
 domani il mio cappello e lo porterai dal cappelliere (to- 
 morrow you will take my hat, and you will carry it to the 
 hatmaker). A third tense of the imperative expresses an 
 action which we wished to be finished (past) at a certain 
 time. Domani abbiate imparata quella lezione (to-morrow 
 you must have learnt that lesson). 
 
 387. It may be noticed here, that when the imperative 
 is negative, and in the. second person singular, the infini- 
 tive is used instead of the usual form. Non batter e quel 
 fanciullo (do not strike that child). Here there is an 
 ellipsis of devi. Non devi battere, &c. (you ought not to 
 strike, &c.) 
 
 388. The optative mood expresses desire. It is used 
 either absolutely or conditionally. Example of the first : 
 Fossa questo fanciullo amare lo studio (may this child 
 love study). Of the second : OA, sefossi da tanto vedresti 
 cosafarei (oh, if I were able, you would see what I would 
 do). In both these examples, the optative mood is in 
 the present tense. 
 
 389. The future and past tenses of the optative mood 
 have the same division in the optative as in the indicative 
 mood. Example of a future imperfect, Dio voglia die io 
 ami ; of a future perfect, Dio voglia che io abbia ad 
 amare (God grant that I may love ; God grant that / 
 may have to love}. 
 
 390. The forms of the optative and subjunctive are the 
 
MOODS AND TENSES. 93 
 
 same in Italian. It must be noticed, however, that the 
 future of one mood has the same form as the present of 
 the other. Dio voglia che to ami (God grant that I may 
 love), here ami is future. Benche io ami (though I may 
 love), here ami is present. 
 
 391. The terminations of the present perfect in the 
 optative become in the subjunctive those of the past im- 
 perfect. Example : Dio volesse che io amassi (would to 
 God that I might love) ; Benche io amassi (though I 
 might have loved). 
 
 392. The infinitive mood can have no tense, yet 
 Italian tenses may be expressed by this mood in a general 
 way. Ex. : Amare (to love), avere amato (past) ; avere 
 ad amare (future imperfect) ; avere avuto ad amare (fu- 
 ture perfect). Essere per amare (to be on the point of 
 loving) ; Essere stato per amare (to have been on the 
 point) ; Essere amato, avere ad essere amato, &c. (to be 
 loved, that shall be loved, &c.) 
 
 393. The participle is either past or present. The 
 present participle is called also Gerondio (gerund).* 
 
 394. We have only two future participles ; futuro (that 
 shall be), and VENTURO (that shall come). Old writers 
 had more. 
 
 * From the present participle or gerund we form an adjective by 
 changing do into te. Amare , amando, amante (to love), loving (par- 
 ticiple), loving (adjective). Amante is also a noun (lover). Gram- 
 marians call this adjective present participle, and the present 
 participle is called only gerund. 
 
REGULAR AND IRREGULAR TENSES. 
 
 395. All verbs end either in are, ere, or ire, in the 
 infinitive. If a verb like condurre (to conduct), ends in 
 a different way, it is contracted from the regular infinitive. 
 Condurre is contracted from conducere. 
 
 396. Some verbs have an i before the termination of 
 the infinitive, to give to the c or g that precedes a soft 
 sound. This i is not necessary if the termination of the 
 tense begin with e or i. Mangiare (to eat), makes 
 mangi-o, mang-i, mangi-a. 
 
 397. Fare (to do), dire (to say), and bere (to drink), 
 are constructed from facere, dicere, and bevere. Facere 
 and dicere are not used ; bevere is more used than bere, 
 which is rather poetical. 
 
 398. When an infinitive is contracted, the future and 
 conditional are generally formed from it. Thus, the fu- 
 ture of condurre is condurro, condurrai, &c. ; the condi- 
 tional, condurrei, condurresti, &c. 
 
 399. Of the eight tenses of the Italian verbs, four are 
 regular and four irregular. 
 
 400. The regular tenses are the imperfect and the/w- 
 ture of the indicative, the conditional, and the imperfect 
 subjunctive. 
 
 401. The irregular are the three present tenses, indi- 
 cative, imperative, and subjunctive, and the past perfect 
 or preterite. The past participle is often irregular also. 
 
 402. The most important conjugation is the second, 
 or that of the verbs ending in ere* Credere should be 
 
 * All verbs are divided into three conjugations, called 1st, 2d, 
 and 3d, not according to their importance, but because in the al- 
 phabet the order of vowels is a, e, and i. 
 

 REGULAR AND IRREGULAR TENSES. 95 
 
 studied as the model verb, or the verb to which all 
 others should be compared. 
 
 403. All those terminations in which the greatest 
 number of verbs agree, or are the same, are regular. All 
 others are irregular. 
 
 404. Credere (to believe) is regular in all its parts 
 except the past participle. As the past participle of 
 am-are is am-ato, of sent-ire sent-ito, the past participle 
 of cred-ere should be cred-eto. It is not so, but cred-uto. 
 
 405. As in all tenses the third person plural is formed 
 by adding either no or ro to the third person singular, 
 the formation of the third person plural of the present 
 indicative from the first, as, cred-o (I believe), cred-o-no 
 (they believe), may be considered irregular. 
 
 406. The first person of the imperfect indicative is 
 either cred-evA or cred-evo. The first form is preferred 
 by the best writers ; the second by the inhabitants of 
 Tuscany, whose spoken language Manzoni has followed 
 in his " Promessi Sposi."* 
 
 407. It is a peculiarity of regular verbs that the root 
 is invariable, the terminations only being changed. Thus, 
 am in amare, cred in credere, sent in sentire, is found in 
 every person. Irregular verbs sometimes have the root 
 and the terminations blended together, so that the in- 
 finitive could not be known from them. Thus the pre- 
 terite of correre (to run) is corsi; the present of (were is 
 ho, &c. 
 
 * It is fortunate for the student of the Italian language that 
 he has such an excellent guide as the " Promessi Sposi," a work 
 which cannot be too highly recommended. It combines genius and 
 a high tone of morality with all the interest of one of the best novels, 
 and is written in a style of the greatest purity. 
 
96 REGULAR AND IRREGULAR TENSES. 
 
 408. The present of the Verb cred-ere is 
 
 \Cred-o. 
 Cred-i. 
 Cred-e. 
 
 Cred-iamo. 
 Cred-ete. 
 ^Cred-o-no. 
 
 409. The present of the Imperative is 
 
 Cred-iamo. 
 
 Cre-dL 
 -j- Cred-a. 
 
 Cred-ete. 
 j- Cred-a-no. 
 
 410. The present of the Subjunctive is 
 
 Che cred-iamo. 
 Che cred-iate. 
 \-Che cred-ano. 
 
 Che 
 
 Che -^cred-a. 
 
 Che -\-cred-a. 
 
 RULES FOB THE PRESENT. 
 
 411. I. The first person plural (iamo) is invariable in 
 all the Italian verbs. 
 
 412. II. The second person plural is always ete in the 
 indicative and imperative ; and in the subjunctive mood 
 it is formed from the first plural by changing mo into te. 
 Che cred-iamo, che cred-iate. 
 
 413. III. In the auxiliary verbs, essere (to be), avere 
 (to have), and sapere (to know), which is conjugated like 
 avere, the second person plural of the imperative is like 
 the second person plural of the subjunctive. 
 
 414. IV. The second person singular in the present, 
 ae well as in all other tenses, ends always in i. In the 
 present subjunctive, however, it may either end in i, or 
 be like the first and third. 
 
 415. V. The third person plural of the present indica- 
 tive is formed by adding no to the first person singular. 
 
 416. VI. The third person singular of the imperative 
 
REGULAR AND IRREGULAR TENSES. 97 
 
 is formed from the first person singular of the present 
 indicative : from credo we form credA. 
 
 417. VII. The three persons singular of the present 
 of the subjunctive are like the third person singular of 
 the imperative. 
 
 418. VIII. The third person plural of the imperative 
 and of the subjunctive are alike, and are formed by add- 
 ing no to the third person singular : creda, creda-no, die 
 creda, che creda-no. 
 
 RULES FOB THE PRETERITE. 
 
 419. The preterite of credere is either regular or irre- 
 gular. 
 
 Regular. 
 
 ei emmo. 
 esti este. 
 e erono. 
 
 Irregular. 
 
 etti emmo. 
 esti este. 
 ette ettero. 
 
 420. All irregular preterites are alike. One person 
 being known, the other two irregular persons are known 
 also. The difference is this : 
 
 The first always end in i. 
 
 The second is formed from the first, by changing i into e. 
 The third plural is formed from the third singular, by 
 adding ro to it. 
 
 421. Though the first person of every irregular pre- 
 terite always ends in i, the rest of the termination, or ra- 
 ther of the person, is different in the various irregular 
 verbs. 
 
 422. The terminations etti, ette, ettero, are irregular 
 because they differ from each other like all irregular ter- 
 minations of the preterite ; but they are regular because 
 they belong to all regular verbs in ere, and to them alone, 
 excepting the preterite of dare (to give) and stare (to re- 
 main). 
 
98 REGULAR AND IRREGULAR TENSES. 
 
 GENERAL OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 423. I. There are some verbs in which the first per- 
 son singular of the indicative may be used as a past par- 
 ticiple. Thus, instead of lo ho guastato (I have spoiled), 
 we may say lo ho guasto, from guasto (I spoil). Prac- 
 tice only can teach in what verbs this may be done. 
 
 424. II. In the verbs ending in care or gare like cer- 
 care (to seek), negare (to deny), the c and g before the 
 termination are always pronounced hard. An h must 
 therefore be added before the terminations if they begin 
 with e or i. lo cerco, tu cherchi, &c. (I seek, thou seekest, 
 &c.) ; lo nego, tu neghi, &c. (I deny, thou deniest, &c). 
 
 425. III. In the verb sentire the past participle is 
 irregular. Cantare makes cantAndo ; credere, credvndo ; 
 but sentire makes sentEndo, not sentmdo. In all other 
 parts it is regular like credere. 
 
 426. IV. Except the present indicative of credere and 
 sentire, the third person plural is formed from the third 
 person singular by adding to it either ro, no, or both. 
 
 427. V. The third person plural of the imperfect in- 
 dicative, future imperative, and present subjunctive, ends 
 in no. 
 
 428. VI. The third person singular of the future being 
 accented, the third person plural ends in anno credera 
 crederanno. 
 
 429. VII. The third person plural of the conditional 
 and of the imperfect subjunctive ends in ro. 
 
 430. VIII. The third person plural of the preterite ends 
 in ro-no crede, crede ro-no. 
 
 431. IX. The future and conditional of the verbs in 
 are are irregular ; it is not cantA.ro cantArai, but cantsro 
 cantErai. 
 
REGULAR AND IRREGULAR TENSES. 99. 
 
 432. X. The third person singular of the indicative in 
 am-are is am-A; in cred-ere, cred-E- and in sent-ire, 
 sent-E. 
 
 433. XI. The third person singular of the preterite in 
 the three conjugations is thus cant-o, cred-E, sent-E. 
 
 434. XII. The imperative singular in credere and sen- 
 tire has for terminations i in the second person, and a in 
 the third. In cantare, on the contrary, a is the termi- 
 nation of the second, and i of the third. 
 
 435. XIII. The compound tenses of all the verbs are 
 formed by adding their past participle to either avere or 
 essere. 
 
 436. XIV. Transitive verbs form their compound tenses 
 with the transitive verb avere ; intransitives, with the 
 intransitive essere. 
 
 437. XV. All verbs conjugated with avere may also 
 be conjugated with essere ; but then the verb becomes 
 passive. lo ho battuto (I have struck) ; lo sono battuto 
 (I am struck). 
 
 438. XVI. After essere the past participle always 
 agrees with the nominative ; noi siamo andati in Italia 
 (we went to Italy). After avere it almost always agrees 
 with the accusative ; noi abbiamo scritta una lettera. 
 
 439. XVII. A correct distinction would be to make 
 the past participle invariable after avere , unless it is 
 properly an adjective. Ho avuezzo Vanima alle pene, 
 would signify, I have accustomed my mind to sufferings, 
 and Ho avvezzA Vanima alle pene, I have my mind ac- 
 customed to sufferings ; but this distinction is seldom 
 used by the best writers, and the preceding rule is gen- 
 erally followed. 
 
100 
 
 PECULIAEITIES IN THE USE OF THE TERBS. 
 
 440. I. As, in the sense of because, is very frequently 
 used in English. " I cannot see him, as I am engaged/' 
 The proper translation of " as I am " is essendo (being). 
 Non posso vederlo essendo impegnato. 
 
 441. II. The present participle in English followed 
 by a past participle is omitted in Italian. " Having seen 
 every thing, he went away " (veduta ogni cosa, se ne andd). 
 
 442. III. In English both the present participle and 
 the infinitive may be used as substantives. In Italian the 
 infinitive only can be a substantive. " Reading is useful," 
 or " it is useful to read " (il leggere e utile). 
 
 443. IV. The present participle is sometimes changed 
 into the infinitive with the preposition a before. " One is 
 never wrong in being silent, or to be silent " (tacendo non 
 si folia maij or a tacere non si f alia mai. 
 
 444. V. A present participle preceded by a preposition 
 is a substantive, and can only be translated by the infi- 
 nitive. " Without looking at me " (senza guardarmi). 
 
 445. VI. It is easy to distinguish a present participle 
 used as a verb from a present participle used as a sub- 
 stantive. When it has the meaning of the verb, it may 
 be put in the same tense as the preceding verb. " She 
 laughs crying, or she laughs and she cries at the same 
 time." The perfect participle only can be used in such 
 a case ; ride piangendo. 
 
 446. VII. u Go and see him," signifies go in order to see 
 him. The Italian for this and similar expressions is 
 andate A vederlo. " Come and walk with me" (venite A 
 passeggiare con me). 
 
 447. VIII. Verbs expressing an action of the mind, 
 
PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OP THE VERBS. 101 
 
 and dire (to say), generally govern the subjunctive. " I 
 do not believe he will come," " tell him to come " (non 
 credo clie venga, ditegli che venga). 
 
 448. IX. Verbs expressing fear or doubt are often 
 accompanied by non (not) as an expletive. Temo che 
 non faccia molti errori (I fear he may commit many mis- 
 takes). 
 
 449. X. The prepositions a or da come often between 
 avere and an infinitive. Ho A sperare, or ho DA sperare. 
 The assertion is stronger when da is used. The first ex- 
 ample means only " I may hope ;" the second, " I have 
 reason, or strong reasons, to hope." 
 
 450. XI. After essere a is placed between an adjective 
 and an infinitive, and da between a noun and an infinitive. 
 E bella a riguardare, e uomo da temere (she is beautiful 
 to look at, he is a man to be feared). Da temere has 
 here the passive signification as da essere temuto. 
 
 451. XII. The student must be cautious not to use 
 English idioms (anglicismi) in speaking or writing Ita- 
 lian. / am going to speak is an idiom, as the word to go 
 is not used in its literal meaning. The translation is Ora 
 parlero. 
 
 452. XIII. Venire (to come) is used, and not andare 
 (to go), when we say that we are going to the house of 
 the persons to whom we speak or write. Verro da voi 
 (I shall go to your house). 
 
 453. XIV. Venire is also used idiomatically instead 
 of essere. Mi venne detto j instead of Mi fu detto (I was 
 told). 
 
 454. XV. To express the continuation of an action for 
 a certain time, an active verb is used in the present par- 
 ticiple either with stare or andare. Sta leggendo (he is 
 reading) ; Va passeggiando (he is walking). The verb 
 
102 PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OF THE VERBS. 
 
 expressing an action that requires a change of place takes 
 andare ; and verbs expressing an action that can happen 
 without change of place, stare. 
 
 455. XVI. The phrases dategli da mangiare, dategli 
 da here, dategli da scrivere, c., signify Give him what 
 is necessary for eating, drinking, writing, &c. 
 
 456. XVII. It is I, it is you, it is he, it is we, &c., 
 are translated by 8ono io, sei tu r e desso, siamo noi, &c. 
 
 457. XVIII. This book belongs to Peter, should be 
 translated by Questo libro e di Pietro, better than literally 
 Questo libro appartiene a Pietro. 
 
 458. XIX. It belongs to you to do it, or it is for you 
 to do it, or it is your turn to do it, are rendered thus, A 
 voi tocca, or a voi sta ilfarlo, or di farlo, or afarlo. 
 
 459. XX. Stare or essere per fare una cosa, signify 
 " to be on the point of doing a thing/' 
 
 460. XXI. Darsi is sometimes used for accadere or 
 essere. Si danno casi (accidents sometimes happen) ; Pud 
 darsi (it may be). 
 
 461. XXII. Volere is often used for " to be necessary." 
 Ci vuolfortuna (fortune is necessary). 
 
 462. XXIII. There is no verb in Italian to translate 
 literally to like. " Do you like apples," must be rendered 
 by, "Do apples please you?" (m piacciono le mele?) 
 
 463. XXIV. To want is rendered by mancare when it 
 means "to be wanting," and by aver bisogno when it means 
 " to have need of." Mi mancano due libri (two books are 
 wanting to me) ; Ho lisogno di due libri (I require, I have 
 need of two books). 
 
 464. XXV. To be hungry, to be thirsty, to be right, 
 to be wrong, are rendered by aver fame, aver sete, aver 
 ragione, aver torto. 
 
 465. XXVI. I think 50, I did so, I hope so, are ren- 
 
PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OF THE VERBS. 103 
 
 dered by LO credo, ilhofatto, lo spero. We say also credo 
 DI si, credo DI no ; (I think so, I think not). 
 
 466. XXVII. Fidarsi (to trust), is followed by di. 
 Non mifido di voi (I do not trust you). 
 
 467. XXVIII. "To play upon an instrument," is 
 translated by suonare ; and "to play, to amuse oneself," 
 by giuocare. 
 
 468. XXIX. " I must go, I must read," are rendered by 
 bisogna die or devo, bisogna che vada or devo andare, &c. 
 
 469. XXX. " I cannot help it," is translated by non 
 
 pOSSO FARE A MENO. 
 
 470. XXXI. The nominative is elegantly placed after 
 the verb, but more so in books than in conversation. 
 "Many thought," &c. (Credevano molti, &c.) 
 
 471. XXXII. Per essere means sometimes " if it is." 
 " A jest, if it is made at an improper time, may become an 
 offence" (una burla per essere detta fuori di tempo, pub 
 diventare una offesa). 
 
 472. XXXIII. Egli la mandb pregando is the same 
 as Egli la mandb a pregare (he sent to beg her). 
 
 473. XXXIV. Collo studiare simpara, s'annego in 
 traversare un fiume (by studying one learns, he was 
 drowned in crossing a river). Observe, con expresses 
 the means by which a thing is done, in the manner, the 
 time of an action. 
 
 474. XXXV. Andare may be used for essere ; thus, 
 Andate cauti nel giudicare (be cautious in judging). 
 
 475. XXXVI. Andare is used for essere in such sen- 
 tences as these : " He is subject to the gout" (VA soggetto 
 alia podagra). 
 
 476. XXXVII. Parlato che ebbe is better and more 
 elegant than quando ebbe parlato, or dopo che ebbe parlato 
 (when he had spoken, or after he had spoken). 
 
 G 
 
104 PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OF THE VERBS. 
 
 477. XXXVIII. "I heard him singing, 11 should be 
 translated by Vho sentito CANTARE. 
 
 478. XXXIX. " If he thinks that it is necessary for 
 him to go there, I cannot help it." The literal transla- 
 tion is, se crede die sia necessario per lui di andarvi, non 
 so che farci ; but Italian writers would prefer saying, 
 se crede ESSERE NECESSARIO (to be necessary), &c., a con- 
 struction imitated from the Latin. 
 
 479. XL. When a verb is followed by a subjunctive 
 which governs a pronominal particle, the latter may either 
 be joined to the infinitive or placed before the first verb. 
 " I do not wish to see him," may be translated by non lo 
 voglio vedere, or nol voglio vedere, or non voglio vederlo. 
 
 480. XLI. Where of two verbs the student is uncer- 
 tain to which he ought to apply the pronominal particle, 
 it will be safer to apply it to the first. 
 
 481. XLII. Lasciare takes no preposition when it 
 means u to allow." "Allow me to speak" (lasciatemi par- 
 lare). It takes di when it means to cease. " She did not 
 leave off laughing all that day" (non lascib diridere tutto 
 quel giorno]. 
 
 482. XLIII. Some of the verbs that govern an infinitive 
 without a preposition are, dovere (to be incumbent), fare 
 (to do), potere (to be able), bisognare (to need), volere 
 (to be willing), vedere (to see), udire (to hear), sentire 
 (to feel), mirare (to behold), guardare (to look), ascoltare 
 (to listen), intendere (to understand), &c. 
 
 483. XLIV. Verrb, verrai, verrd, &c., is the future 
 of venire (to come), not of vedere (to see). 
 
 484. XLV. Accostare means "to approach," not "to 
 accost." 
 
 485. XLVI. Though sortire is used even by Italians 
 instead of uscire (go out), it should be avoided. Sortire 
 means to draw out, or to come out by lot or chance. 
 
PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OF THE VERBS. 105 
 
 486. XL VII. " Will you have" is translated by volete. 
 " Will you have a knife?" (volete un coltetto ?) 
 
 487. XL VIII. A preposition in Italian is always fol- 
 lowed by an infinitive, never by a present participle. 
 " I am afraid of losing" (temo DI PERDERE). 
 
 488. XLIX. Verbs having a preposition prefixed to 
 them, as addurre (to convey), congratularsi (to congratu- 
 late), incorrere (to run into), frammettersi (to interpose), 
 are generally followed by the same preposition. Mi con- 
 gratulo con voi (I congratulate you). 
 
 489. L. Pensare (to think), followed by a noun or 
 pronoun, takes after it the preposition a. "I think of her " 
 (penso a lei)] when followed by an infinitive it takes di. 
 u I think of going there " (penso di andarvi). 
 
 490. LI. " To think " is very frequently used in Eng- 
 lish, but sometimes it may be entirely omitted in Italian, 
 as the phrase may be perfectly clear without it. 
 
 491. LII. "To think" is only translated by pensare 
 when used in its literal meaning ; when it means " to be- 
 lieve," we should employ credere. 
 
 492. LIII. It will be better in many cases not to 
 translate "to think" by credere, but by sperare (to hope), 
 or temere (to fear), according as the sense may suggest. 
 
 493. LIV. " See that man holding a knife " should be 
 translated by vedete quell 1 uomo CHE TIENE un coltello, 
 and not TENENDO un coltello. 
 
 494. LV. The imperfect of the verbs in ere and ire 
 often lose the v in poetry, as credea, credeano ; sentia, 
 sentiano; instead of credeva, credevano; sentiva, sentivano. 
 
 495. LVI. The conditional of amerebbe, crederebbe, 
 sentirebbe, is changed in poetry into ameria, crederia, 
 sentiria. 
 
PART IV. 
 
 ON THE ITALIAN VERBS. 
 
PAST IV. 
 
 ON THE ITALIAN VERBS. 
 
 Conjugation of the verbs Essere, to be ; Avere, to bave. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 Essere, to be. Avere, to have. 
 
 PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Essendo, being. Avendo, having. 
 
 PAST PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Oy been. Avuto, had. 
 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 Sono, I am. 
 
 Ho, I have. 
 
 SW, 
 
 Hai, 
 
 E, 
 
 Ha, 
 
 Siamo, 
 
 Abbiamo, 
 
 Siete, 
 
 Avete, 
 
 SonOy 
 
 Hanno 9 
 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 Era, I was. 
 
 Aveva, I had. 
 
 Eri, 
 
 Avevi, 
 
 Era, 
 
 Aveva, 
 
 Eravamo, 
 
 Avevamo, 
 
 Eravate, 
 
 Avevate, 
 
 Erano, 
 
 Avevano f 
 
110 VERBS. 
 
 Fui, I was. Ebbi 9 I had. 
 
 Fostiy Avesti, 
 
 Fu. Ebbe, 
 
 Fummo, Avemmo, 
 
 Foste, Aveste, 
 
 Furono, Ebbero 9 
 
 FUTURE. 
 
 Sarb, I shall or will be. Avrb, I shall or will have, 
 
 Sarai, Avrai, 
 
 Sard, Avrd, 
 
 Saremo, Avremo, 
 
 Sarete, Avrete, 
 
 Saranno, Avranno, 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 Sarei, I should or would be. Avrei, I should or would have. 
 
 Saresti, Avresti, 
 
 Sarebbe, Avrebbe, 
 
 Saremmo, Avremmo, 
 
 Sareste, Avreste, 
 
 Sarebbero, Avrebbero, 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Sii, be. Abbi, have. 
 
 Sia, Abbia, 
 
 SiamOy Abbiamo, 
 
 State, Abbiate, 
 
 Siano> Abbiano, 
 
 CONJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Che sia, that I may be. Che dbbia, that I may have. 
 
 Che sia, Che dbbia or abbi, 
 
 Che *m, Che dbbia, 
 
 Che siamo, Che abbiamo, 
 
 Che siate, Che abbiate, 
 
 Che siano> Che dbbiano > 
 
VERBS. 
 
 Ill 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 Chefossi, that I might be. 
 
 Chefossi, 
 
 Chefosse, 
 
 Chefbssimo, 
 
 Chefoste, 
 
 Chefbssero, 
 
 Che avessi y that I might have. 
 
 Che avessi, 
 
 Che avesse, 
 
 Che avessimo, 
 
 Che aveste, 
 
 Che avessero, 
 
 Compounds of the verb Essere. Compounds of the verb Avere. 
 
 Essere stato, to have been. Es- 
 sendo stato, having been, &c. 
 Sono stato, &c., I have been, 
 &c. Era stato, &c., I had 
 been, &c. Fui stato, &c., I 
 had been, &c. Saro stato 9 
 &c., I shall or will have 
 been, &c. Sarei stato, &c., 
 I might have been, &c. Sii 
 stato, &c., have been, &c. 
 Che sia stato, &c., that I may 
 have been, &c. Che fossi 
 stato, &c., that I might have 
 been, &c. 
 
 Avere avuto, to have had. A - 
 vendo avuto, having had. 
 Ho avuto, &c., I have had, 
 &c. Avera avuto, &c., I 
 had had, &c. Ehbi avuto, 
 &c., I had liad, &c. Avro 
 avuto, &c., I shall or will 
 have had, &c. Avrei avuto, 
 &c., I might have had, &c. 
 Abbi avuto, &c. 5 have had, 
 &c. Che dbbia avuto, &c., 
 that I may have had, &c. 
 Che avesti avuto, &c., that 
 I might have had^ &c. 
 
 CONJUGATIONS. 
 OF REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 Cantare, 
 to sinff. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 Credere, 
 to believe. 
 
 Sentire, 
 to feel. 
 
 Cantando, 
 singing. 
 
 PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Credendo, 
 believing. 
 
 Sentendo, 
 feeling. 
 
112 
 
 VERBS. 
 
 
 PAST PARTICIPLE. 
 
 
 Cantato, 
 
 CredutOy 
 
 Sentito, 
 
 snng. 
 
 believed. 
 
 felt. 
 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 
 Canto, 
 
 Credo, 
 
 Sento, 
 
 I sing. 
 
 I believe. 
 
 I feel. 
 
 Canti, 
 
 Credi, 
 
 Senti, 
 
 Ganta, 
 
 Crede, 
 
 Sente, 
 
 Cantiamo, 
 
 Crediamo, 
 
 SentiamOy 
 
 Gantate, 
 
 CredetCj 
 
 Sentite, 
 
 Gdntano, 
 
 Credono, 
 
 Sentono, 
 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 
 Cantava, I sung or 
 
 Credeva y I believed 
 
 Sentiva, I felt or 
 
 was singing. 
 
 or was believing. 
 
 was feeling. 
 
 Cantavi, 
 
 Credevi, 
 
 Sentivi, 
 
 Cantava, 
 
 Credeva, 
 
 Sentiva, 
 
 Cantavamo, 
 
 CredevamOy 
 
 Sentivamo, 
 
 Cantavate, 
 
 Credevate, 
 
 Sentivate, 
 
 Cantdvano, 
 
 Gredevano, 
 
 Sentivano, 
 
 
 PERFECT. 
 
 
 Cantai, 
 
 Credei, 
 
 Sentii, 
 
 I sung. 
 
 I believed. 
 
 I felt. 
 
 Cantasti, 
 
 Credesti, 
 
 Sentisti, 
 
 Canto, 
 
 Grede, 
 
 Senti, 
 
 Cantammo, 
 
 Credemmo, 
 
 SentimntOy 
 
 Gantaste, 
 
 Gredeste, 
 
 Sentiste, 
 
 CantdronOy 
 
 Crederono, 
 
 Sentirono, 
 
 
 FUTURE. 
 
 
 Cantero, 
 
 Crederb, 
 
 Sentirb, 
 
 I shall sing. 
 
 I shall believe. 
 
 I shall feel. 
 
 Canterai, 
 
 Grederai, 
 
 Sentirai, 
 
 Cantera, 
 
 Credera 
 
 Sentird, 
 
 Canteremo, 
 
 Crederemo, 
 
 Sentiremo, 
 
 Canterete, 
 
 Crederete, 
 
 Sentirete, 
 
 Ganteranno, 
 
 Crederanno, 
 
 SentirannOy 
 
VERBS. 
 
 113 
 
 CONDITIONAL MOOD. 
 
 Canterei, 
 
 Crederei, 
 
 Sentirei, 
 
 I should sing. 
 
 I should believe. 
 
 I should feel. 
 
 Oanteresti, 
 
 Crederesti, 
 
 Sentiresti, 
 
 Canterebbe, 
 
 Crederebbe, 
 
 Sentirebbe, 
 
 Canteremmo, 
 
 Crederemmo, 
 
 Sentiremmo, 
 
 Cantereste, 
 
 Credereste, 
 
 Sentireste, 
 
 Canterebbero, 
 
 Crederebbero, 
 
 Sentirebbero, 
 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 
 Canta, sing. 
 
 Credi 9 believe. 
 
 Senti, feel. 
 
 Canti, 
 
 Creda, 
 
 Senta, 
 
 Cantiamo, 
 
 Crediamo, 
 
 Sentiamo, 
 
 Cantate, 
 
 Credete, 
 
 Sentite, 
 
 Cdntino, 
 
 Credano, 
 
 Sentano, 
 
 CONJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 
 Che canti, that I 
 
 Che creda, that I 
 
 Che senta, that I 
 
 may sing. 
 
 may believe. 
 
 may feel. 
 
 Che canti, 
 
 Che creda, 
 
 Che senta, 
 
 Che canti, 
 
 Che creda, 
 
 Che senta, 
 
 Che cantiamo, 
 
 Che crediamo, 
 
 Che sentiamo, 
 
 Che cantiate, 
 
 Che crediate, 
 
 Che sentiate. 
 
 Che cdntino, 
 
 Che credano, 
 
 Che sentano, 
 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 
 Che cantassi, 
 
 Che credessi, 
 
 Che sentissi, 
 
 that I sung. 
 
 that I believed. 
 
 that I felt. 
 
 Che cantassi, 
 
 Che credessi, 
 
 Che sentissi, 
 
 Che cantasse, 
 
 Che credesse, 
 
 Che sentisse, 
 
 Che cantdssimo, 
 
 Che credessimo, 
 
 Che sentlssimoy 
 
 Che cantaste, 
 
 Che credeste, 
 
 Che sentiste, 
 
 Che cantdssero, 
 
 Che credesserOy 
 
 Che sentissero, 
 
114 IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 COMPOUNDS OF THESE VERBS. 
 
 Avere cantato, creduto, sentito, to have sung, believed, felt. 
 Ho cantato, creduto, sentito, I have sung, believed, felt, &c. 
 All the other tenses are composed in the same manner. 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 These are four only : Andare, dare, fare, stare. 
 
 Andare, to go. Andando, going. Andato, gone. 
 
 Vo or vado, 1 go ; vai, va, andiamo, andate, vanno. Andava, 
 I was going, &c. Andai, I went, &c. Andrb, I shall go, &c. 
 Andrei, I should go, &c. Va, go,, vada, andiamo, andate, 
 vddano. Che vada, that I may go, &c. Che andassi, that I 
 might go, &c. 
 
 Dare, to give. Dando, giving. Dato, given. 
 Do, I give ; dai, da, diamo., date, danno. Dava, I was giving, 
 &c. Diede or detti, I gave ; desti, diede or dette, demmo, deste, 
 diedero or dettero. Darb, I shall give, &c. Darei, I should 
 give, &c. Dd 9 give ; dia, diamo, date, diano. Che dia, that 
 I may give, &c. Che dessi, that I might give, &c. 
 
 Fare, to do. Facendo, doing. Fatto, done. 
 
 Fo, I do ; fai, fa, facciamo, fate, fanno. Faceva, I was 
 doing, &c. Fed, I did; facesti,fece,facemmo,faceste,fecero. 
 Faro, I shall do, &c. Farei, I should do, &c. Fa, do ; 
 fdccia, facciamo, fate, fdcciano. Che faccia, that I may do, 
 &c. Chefacessi, that I might do, &c. 
 
 Stare, to stand. Stando, standing. Stato, stood. 
 ^ 
 
 Sto, I stand ; stai, sta^mamo, state, stanno. Stava. Stetti, 
 I stood ; stesti, stette, stemmo, steste, stettero. Staro. Starei. 
 Sta, stia, stiamo, state, stidno. Che stia. Che stessi. 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 115 
 
 SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 Here are two classes of verbs, those which have the accent 
 on the antepenultimate, and those on the penultimate vowel. 
 The first have only the perfect and past participle irreg- 
 ular, and sometimes only the one j 1 whilst the others have 
 various irregularities, except persuader e and solere, which 
 have only these irregular forms, persuasi, persuaso, sblito. 
 
 VERBS OF THE FIRST CLASS. 
 
 Tor 
 
 cere. 
 
 to twist. 
 
 tor 
 
 si 
 
 torto. 
 
 Ucci 
 
 dere, 
 
 to kill. 
 
 ucci 
 
 si 
 
 ucciso. 2 
 
 Ace or 
 
 gere, 
 
 to perceive. 
 
 ace or 
 
 si 
 
 accorto. 3 
 
 Fri 
 
 ggere, 
 
 to fry. 
 
 fri 
 
 ssi 
 
 fritto. 
 
 Co 
 
 gliere, 
 
 to gather. 
 
 CO 
 
 Isi 
 
 colto. 
 
 Distin 
 
 guere, 
 
 to distinguish. 
 
 distin 
 
 si 
 
 distinto. 
 
 M 
 
 ettere, 
 
 to put. 
 
 m 
 
 isi 
 
 messo. 4 
 
 Pr 
 
 emere, 
 
 to press. 
 
 pr 
 
 essi 
 
 presso. 
 
 Espr 
 
 imere, 
 
 to express. 
 
 espr 
 
 essi 
 
 espresso. 5 
 
 Acce 
 
 ndere, 
 
 to kindle. 
 
 acce 
 
 si 
 
 acceso. 6 
 
 Ass 
 
 olvere, 
 
 to absolve. 
 
 ass 
 
 olsi 
 
 assolto. 7 
 
 Corr 
 
 bmpere, 
 
 to corrupt. 
 
 corr 
 
 uppi 
 
 corrotto. 
 
 Cor 
 
 rere, 
 
 to run. 
 
 cor 
 
 si 
 
 corso. 
 
 Ceno 
 
 scere, 
 
 to know. 
 
 cono 
 
 bbi 
 
 conosciuto. 
 
 Discu 
 
 tere, 
 
 to discuss. 
 
 discu 
 
 ssi 
 
 discusso. 
 
 Pres 
 
 umere. 
 
 to presume. 
 
 pres 
 
 unsi 
 
 presunto. 
 
 C 
 
 ubcere, 
 
 to cook. 
 
 c 
 
 ossi 
 
 cltto* 
 
 Perc 
 
 ubtere, 
 
 to strike. 
 
 perc 
 
 ossi 
 
 percosso. 
 
 Comm 
 
 ubvere, 
 
 to shake. 
 
 comm 
 
 ossi 
 
 commosso. 
 
 Vi 
 
 vere, 
 
 to live. 
 
 vi 
 
 ssi 
 
 vissuto. 
 
 Nascere, to be born, makes ndcqui, nato ; and piovere, to 
 rain, piovve. 
 
 1 These verbs and their compounds are excepted : Battere, 
 capere, credere, emjnere, esiffere,fendere,fremere, gemere, mietere, 
 mescere, pascere, pendere, perdere, prescmdere, ricevere, resistere, 
 riflettere, ripetere, scernere, solvere, spandere, splendere, spremere, 
 strtdere, succombere, suggere, fondere, vendere. 
 
 2 Cedere : cessi or cedetti ; cesso or ceduto. 
 
 3 Dirigere: essi, etto. Esigere : jjjtfatto. Ginger e : nsi, into. 
 Negligere : essi, etto. 
 
 4 Flettere: flessi,fiesso. 5 Espellere : ulsi, ulso. 
 
 6 Fondere : fusi,fuso. 
 
 7 Also assoluto. Sphere : ei etti ; uto. Invdlvero, invdlto. 
 
 8 Nucocere : ndcqui, nociuto. 
 
116 IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 VERBS OP THE SECOND CLASS. 1 
 
 r 
 
 I. Condurre for Conducere, to lead. 
 
 Pres. part. Gonducendo, leading. 
 Past part. Condotto, led. 
 
 Conduco, I lead. Conduceva, I was leading. Condussi, I 
 led. Condurrb, I shall lead. Condurrei, I should lead. Con- 
 dud, lead, conduca, &c. * Che conducessi, that I might lead. 
 
 II. Severe, or contracted, Bere, to drink. 
 
 This verb is regular, except that we may say bevo or beo ; 
 beveva or beeva, &c. Of the three forms of the perfect the 
 first is in greatest use : bevvi, bevei, or bevetti. 
 
 lll.Cadere, to fall. 
 
 * * * Caddi, I fell. Caderb or cadrb, I shall fall. Caderei 
 or cadrei, I should fall. * * * 
 
 IV. Chiedere, to ask. 
 Past part. Chiesto, asked. 
 
 Chiedo or chieggo, I ask, &c. ; chiedono or chieggono, they 
 ask. * Chiesi) I asked. * * Chieda or chiegga, let him ask ; 
 chiedano or chieggano, let them ask. 
 
 V. Dire, for Dicer e, to say. 
 
 Pres. part. Dicendo, saying. 
 Past part. Detto, said. 
 
 Di'co, I say ; rfici (or di') dice, diciamo, dite, dtcono. Diceva, 
 I was saying. Dissi, I said. Dirb, I shall say. Direi, I 
 
 1 The irregular forms alone are given. 
 
 The second person singular in the Subjunctive has two forms : che 
 credo, or credi. 
 
 The asterisk (*) denotes the regular tenses, or those which the 
 pupil should form according to the above rules. 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 117 
 
 should say. Di\ say ; dica, c. * Che dicessi, that I might 
 
 say. 
 
 VI. Dolere (si), to complain. 
 
 * Mi dolgo or doglio, I complain ; ti duoli, si duole, ci do- 
 gliamo, vi dolete, &c. * Mi dolsi, I complained. Mi dorrb, 
 I shall complain. Mi dorrei, I should complain. Dubliti, 
 complain ; dolgasi or dogliasi, &c. * 
 
 VII. Dovere, to owe. 
 
 Debbo or deggio, I owe ; dei, dee, or debbe, dobbiamo, c. * * 
 Dovrb, I shall owe. Dovrei, I should owe. Che debba, that 
 I may owe, &c. ; dobbiamo 9 dobbiate, debbano. * 
 
 VIII. Nuocere, to hurt. 
 
 Part. pres. Nocendo, hurting. 
 Part, past, Nociuto, hurt. 
 
 Nuoco or noccio, I hurt ; nuoci, nuoce, nocciamo, nocete, &c. 
 Noceva, I was hurting. Nocqui, I hurt. Nocerb, I shall hurt. 
 Nocerei, I should hurt. Nuoci, hurt ; nubccia or noccia, &c. 
 
 IX. Parere, to appear. 
 Past part. Paruto or parso, appeared. 
 
 Paio, I appear ; pari, pare, paiamo, parete, pdiono. Parvi, 
 I appeared. Parrb, I shall appear. Parrel, I should appear. 
 Pari, appear ; paia, paiano, parete, paiano. 
 
 X. Piacere, to please. 
 Past part. Piaciuto, pleased. 
 
 Pidccio, I please ; piaci, &c. Piacqui, I pleased. * Piaci, 
 please ; piaccia, &c. * * So also the verb Giacere. 
 
118 IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 XI. Porre for Ponere, to put. 
 
 Part, present, Ponendo, putting. 
 Part, past, Posto, put. 
 
 Pongo, I put ; poni, pone, poniamo, ponete, pbngono. Po- 
 neva, I was putting. Posi,Iput. Porrb, I shall put. Porrei, 
 I should put. Poni, put ; ponga, &c. ' 
 
 Xll.Potere, to be able. 
 
 Posso, I can ; puoi, pub, possiamo, potete, possono. * 
 Potrdy I shall be able. Potrei, I should be able. Che possa, 
 that I might be able, &c. 
 
 XIII. Rimanere, to stay. 
 Past part. Rimaso or rimasto, stayed. 
 
 Rimango, I stay ; rimani, rimane, &c. * Rimasi, I stayed. 
 Rimarrb, I shall stay. Rimarrei, I should stay. Rimani, 
 stay ; rimanga, &c. 
 
 XIV. Sapere, to know. 
 
 So, I know ; sat, sa, sappiamo, sapete, sanno. Seppi, I 
 knew. Saprb, I shall know. Saprei, I should know. Sappi, 
 know ; sappia, sappiamo, sappiate, sappiano, &c. 
 
 XV. Scegliere or Seer re, to choose. 
 Past part, scelto, chosen. 
 
 Scelgo or sceglio, I choose. ' : " Scelsi, I chose. ' * Scegli, 
 choose ; scelga or sceglia, &c. 
 
 XVI.Sedere, to sit. 
 
 ^ierfi or seggo, I sit ; siedi, siede, sediamo or seggiamo, sedete, 
 &c. * * * * fecft, sit ; 6-zeofa or segga, &c. 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 119 
 
 XVII. Svellere, to tear away. 
 Past part. Svelto, torn away. 
 
 Svelyo or svello, I tear ; svelli, svelte or sveglie, &c. * Svelsi, 
 I tore. * * * Svelli, tear ; svella or svelga, &c. * * 
 
 XVIII. Tacere, to be silent. 
 Past part. Taciuto, silent. 
 
 Tdcio, I am silent ; taci, &c. * Tdcqui, I was silent. :; 
 Taci, be silent ; taccia, &c. 
 
 XIX. Tenure, to hold. 
 
 Tengo, I hold ; ft'eni, It eae, &c. * Tenni, I held. Terro, I 
 shall hold. Terrei, I should hold. Tieni, hold ; tenga, &c. 
 
 XX. Togliere or Torre, to take away. 
 Past part. To/fo, taken away. 
 
 Toglio or %o, I take away ; togli, toglie, &c. Tolsi, I 
 
 took away. Togliero or ^orro, I shall take away. Toglierei or 
 torrei, I should take away. Togli, take away ; toglia or ^o/^ra ? 
 &c. 
 
 XXI. Traere or Trarre, to draw. 
 
 Part, present, Traendo, drawing. 
 Part, past, Tratto, drawn. 
 
 Traggo, I draw ; ^rai, ^rae, traiamo, or traggiamo, &c. ' 
 Trassi 9 1 drew. Trarrb, I shall draw. Trarrei, I should draw. 
 7>a*, draw ; tragga, &c. 
 
 XXII. Valere, to be worth. 
 
 Fa/^o or vaglio, I am worth ; t?a/i, va/e, vagliamo, &c. * 
 J "afe i, I was worth. Farro, I shall be worth. Farm, I should 
 be worth. Fa/i, be worth ; t?a/gra or vdglia, &c. 
 
120 IREEGULAR VERBS. 
 
 XXIII. Vedere, to see. 
 
 Vedo or veggo or veggio, I see, &c. ; vediamo OTveggiamo, &c. * 
 Vidi 9 1 saw. Vedrb, I shall see. Vedrei, I should see. Vedi, 
 see ; verfa or vegga or veggia, &c. 
 
 XXIV. Volere, to be willing. 
 
 Voglio or vo', I am willing ; vwoi, vwo/e or vuo 9 , vogliamo, 
 volete, vogliono. * Volli, I was willing. Vorrb, I shall be 
 willing. Form, I should be willing. Che voglia, that I may 
 be willing. 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 All these verbs are conjugated like Unire, which is 
 irregular only in the present of the Indicative, Imperative, 
 and Subjunctive, except the first and second persons plural. 
 
 Pres. Ind. Unisco, unisci, unisce, unlscono, I unite, 
 
 &c. 
 
 Imperat. Uriisci, unisca, uniscano. 
 
 Subj. Che unisca,) unisca or unischi, unisca, uni- 
 scano. 
 
 The verb Apparire has the two forms, apparisce or appare, 
 appariscono or appaiono ; so also have Aprire, Coprire, and 
 Scoprire, as aprii, and apersi, &c. 
 
 Some of these verbs in the present Indicative, Impera- 
 tive, or Subjunctive, have two forms ; thus, Ablorrire 
 makes dbborrisco or abbdrro, &c. Their use can be learned 
 only by practice. 
 
 The following verbs of this conjugation have some 
 peculiar irregularities. 
 
 I. Morire, to die. 
 Past part. Morto, dead. 
 Muoio, I die ; muori, muore, moiamo, morite, mubiono. * 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 121 
 
 Morrb, I shall die. Morrei, I should die. Muori, die ; muoia, 
 &c. 
 
 II. Salire, to ascend. 
 
 Salgo, I ascend, &c. ; sagliamo, &c. * * * g a i^ 
 
 ascend ; saiga, sagliamo, &c. 
 
 III. Seguire, to follow. 
 
 Seguo or sieguo, I follow ; segui or siegui, segue or siegue, 
 &c. * >f Segui, follow ; segua,&c. Che segua or siegua, 
 
 that I may follow ; seguano. 
 
 IV. Udire, to hear. 
 Oc?o, I hear; odi, ode, &c. * * * * Cdi, hear; 6da,&c. 
 
 V. Uscire, to go out. 
 
 Z&co, I go out ; esci, esce, &c. * * * * Esci, go out ; 
 esca, &c. 
 
 VI. Venire, to come. 
 
 Vengo, I come ; w'ern, rferie, &c. * Venni, I came. Verrb, 
 I shall come. Verrei, I should come. Vieni, come ; venga, 
 let him come, &c. 
 
 DEFECTIVE VERBS. 
 
 I. Inf. 6re>e, to go. Past part. <2e7o, gone. 
 
 Pres. ind. Gite, you go 
 
 Imp erf. Giva or gia, givi, giva or ^rza ; giva mo, givate, givano, 
 or giano. 
 
 Perfect. Gisti, gi or gto; gimmo, giste, girono. 
 
 Future. Giro, gird; giremo, girete, giranno, 
 
 Condit. Girei, I should go, &c. 
 
 Imperat. Gite, go, &c. 
 
 Imperf. subj. Gissi 9 that I might go, &c. 
 
 H 
 
122 DEFECTIVE VERBS. 
 
 II. Inf. Ire, to go. Past part. Ito, gone. 
 
 Pres. Ite, you go. 
 
 Imperf. Iva, he was going ; ivano, they were going. 
 Fut. Iremo, we shall go ; irete, iranno. 
 Imperat. Ite, go. 
 
 III. Riedere, to return. 
 
 Pres. Riedi, thou returnest ; riede, he returns. 
 Imperat. Riedano, let them return. 
 
 IV. Olire, to smell good. 
 Imperf. Oliva, olivi, oliva, &c., olivano. 
 
 V. Calere, to care for, or mind. 
 
 Past part. Caluto, cared for. 
 Pres. Mi cale, I care for. 
 Imperf. Mi caleva, I was caring for. 
 Perf. Mi calse, I cared for, &c. 
 
 VI. Solere, to be wont, to be accustomed. 
 
 Part. pres. Solendo, being accustomed. 
 
 Past part. Solito, accustomed. 
 
 Pres. Soylio, suoli or suo 9 , suole ; sogliamo, solete, sogliono. 
 
 Comp. perf. Fui solito, I had been accustomed, &c. 
 
 Imperf. Soleva, I was accustomed. 
 
 Pres. subj. Che sbglia, that I may be accustomed, &c. 
 
 Imp. subj. Che solessi, that I might be accustomed, c. 
 
123 
 
 LIST OF VERBS CONJUGATED LIKE Unire* 
 
 Abbellire, to embellish. 
 
 abbonire, to render good. 
 
 dbbronzire, to become dark. 
 
 abbrostire, to toast. 
 
 abbrostolire, to toast. 
 
 abbruttire, to become ugly. 
 
 abolire, to abolish. 
 
 accalorire, to heat. 
 
 acco/orire, to colour. 
 
 accudire, to attend. 
 
 acetire, to become sour. 
 
 addolcire, to sweeten. 
 
 aderire, to adhere. 
 
 affievolire, to weaken. 
 
 affortire, to strengthen. 
 
 affralire, to become frail. 
 
 aggentilire, to become noble 
 or gentle. 
 
 aggradire, to please or be 
 pleased. 
 
 aggrandire, to become great. 
 
 agguerrire, to become war- 
 like or fit for war. 
 
 alleggerire, to lighten. 
 
 allenire, to soften, to allay. 
 
 allcstire, to get ready. 
 
 amarire, to embitter. 
 
 ambire, to aspire. 
 
 ammanire, to get ready. 
 
 ammansire, to tame. 
 
 ammattire, to go distracted. 
 
 ammollire, to mollify. 
 ammonire, to admonish. 
 ammorbidire, to soften. 
 ammortire, to quench. 
 ammutire, to become dumb. 
 ammutolire, to become dumb. 
 anneghittire, to grow lazy. 
 annerire, to blacken. 
 annichilire, to annihilate. 
 appassire, to wither. 
 appetire, to covet. 
 appiccinire, to diminish. 
 appigrire, to become lazy. 
 arricchire, to grow rich. 
 arrossire, to blush, become 
 
 red. 
 
 arrostire, to roast. 
 arrozzire, to make rough. 
 arruginire, to grow rusty. 
 asserire, to assert. 
 assordire, to deafen. 
 assortire, to sort. 
 assoggettire, to subject. 
 atterrire, to frighten. 
 attribuire 9 to attribute. 
 attristire, to grieve. 
 attutire, to blunt. 
 avvilirCy to vilify. 
 avvizzire, to fade away. 
 bandire, to proclaim. 
 blandire, to flatter. 
 
 * The student before using any verbs in ir<? should consult this 
 table to see if they be not conjugated like unire. 
 
124 
 
 LIST OF VERBS CONJUGATED LIKE unlre. 
 
 brandire, to brandish. 
 brunire, to burnish. 
 candire, to preserve, as in 
 
 conserves. 
 
 chiarire, to clear up. 
 circuire, to go round. 
 color ire, to colour. 
 colpire, to strike. 
 concepire, to conceive. 
 condire, to season. 
 conferire, to confer. 
 construire, to construct. 
 contribuire, to contribute. 
 contrire, to make penitent. 
 costituire, to constitute. 
 costruire, to construct. 
 custodire, to guard. 
 deferire, to defer. 
 definire, to define. 
 demolire, to demolish. 
 differire, to defer. 
 diffinire, to define. 
 digerire, to digest. 
 disasprire, to allay. 
 diseppellire, to unbury. 
 ditfavorire, to be against one. 
 disfinire, to cease. 
 disfornire, to unfurnish. 
 disghiottire, to sob. 
 disgradire, to slight. 
 disimpedire y not to hinder. 
 dispartire, to part. 
 disruvidire, to smooth. 
 distribuire, to distribute. 
 disubbidire, to disobey. 
 disvigorire, to weaken. 
 disunire, to disunite. 
 erudire, to instruct 
 
 esaurire, to exhaust. 
 
 eribire, to exhibit. 
 
 esinanire, to annihilate. 
 
 espedire, to dispatch. 
 
 fallire, to fail. 
 
 fastidire, to loathe. 
 
 favorire, to favour. 
 
 finire, to finish. 
 
 fiorire, to flower. 
 
 fluire, to flow. 
 
 fornire, to furnish. 
 
 garantire, to warrant. 
 
 gestire, to gesticulate. 
 
 ghermire, to lay hold of. 
 
 gioire, to rejoice. 
 
 gradire, to accept with plea- 
 sure. 
 
 grancire, to hook. 
 
 granire, to seed. 
 
 gremh'e,to seize with violence. 
 
 grugnire, to grunt. 
 
 guaire, to wail. 
 
 gualcire, to handle. 
 
 guarire, to recover one's 
 health. 
 
 guarnire, to trim. 
 
 illardire, to lard. 
 
 illanguidire, to languish. 
 
 illiquidire, to turn liquid. 
 
 imbaldanzire, to embolden. 
 
 imbaldire, to embolden. 
 
 imbandire, to get a great din- 
 ner ready. 
 
 imbarberire, to grow cruel. 
 
 ijnbarbogire, to dote through 
 old age. 
 
 imbastardire, to degenerate. 
 
 imbastire, to baste. 
 
LIST OF VERBS CONJUGATED LIKE Wlire. 
 
 125 
 
 imbellire, to embellish. 
 
 imbestialire, to grow mad or 
 cruel. 
 
 imbianchire, to whiten. 
 
 imbiondire, to grow fair. 
 
 imbizzarrire, to fall into a 
 violent passion. 
 
 imbolsire, to grow pursy. 
 
 imbonire, to appease. 
 
 imbottire, to quilt. 
 
 imbozzacchire, not to thrive. 
 
 imbricconire, to grow knavish. 
 
 imbrunire, to grow brown. 
 
 imbruschire, to grow sour. 
 
 imbruttire, to become ugly. 
 
 immagrire, to become lean. 
 
 immalvagire, to become 
 wicked. 
 
 immarcire, to rot. 
 
 impadronire, to become mas- 
 ter of. 
 
 impallidire, to turn pale. 
 
 impaurire, to frighten. 
 
 impazientire, to be impatient. 
 
 impedire, to hinder. 
 
 impervertire, to prevent. 
 
 impiccolire, to become small. 
 
 impigrire, to become lazy. 
 
 impoltronire, to become lazy. 
 
 imporrire, to rotten. 
 
 impostemirej to posthumate. 
 
 impoverire, to grow poor. 
 
 improsperire, to grow pros- 
 perous. 
 
 imputridire, to putrefy. 
 
 inacerbire, to grow cruel. 
 
 inacetire, to grow sour. 
 
 inacutire, to make sharp. 
 
 inalidire, to become dry. 
 
 inanimire, to encourage. 
 
 inaridire, to dry or become 
 dry. 
 
 inasinire, to become stupid, 
 like an ass. 
 
 inasprire, to exasperate. 
 
 inavarire, to become a miser. 
 
 incagnire, to become surly, 
 like a dog. 
 
 i?icallire 9 to grow callous. 
 
 incalvire, to become bald. 
 
 incanutire, to become white, 
 to grow old. 
 
 incaparbire, to be obstinate. 
 
 incapocchire, to cover with 
 a hood. 
 
 incaponire, to become stub- 
 born. 
 
 incapriccire, to become de- 
 sirous of any thing. 
 
 incatarrarire, to catch a cold. 
 
 incatorzolire, spoil by a blast. 
 
 incattivire, to become wicked. 
 
 incenerire, to reduce to ashes. 
 
 incerconire, to turn sour as 
 wine does. 
 
 inciprignire, to grow angry. 
 
 incicilire, to grow civil. 
 
 incollorire, to colour. 
 
 incrudelire, to become cruel. 
 
 incrudire, to irritate. 
 
 indebolire, to weaken. 
 
 indolcire, to sweeten. 
 
 indolentire, to benumb. 
 
 indolenzire, to benumb. 
 
 indrudire, to become a lover. 
 
 infarcire, to stuff. 
 
126 
 
 LIST OF VERBS CONJUGATED LIKE 
 
 infastidire, to trouble. 
 
 infellonire, to grow cruel. 
 
 infemminire, to become ef- 
 feminate. 
 
 inferire, to infer. 
 
 inferocire, to become fierce. 
 
 infervorire, to animate. 
 
 infiacchire, to weaken. 
 
 infievolire, to weaken. 
 
 infingardire, to grow lazy. 
 
 infollire, to grow mad. 
 
 irifortire, to strengthen. 
 
 infmcidire> to rot. 
 
 infralire, to become weak. 
 
 infrigidire, to become cold. 
 
 ingagliardire, to strengthen. 
 
 ingelosire, to become jealous. 
 
 ingentilire, to become noble. 
 
 ingerir&i to meddle. 
 
 ingiallire, to become yellow. 
 
 ingiovanire, to become young. 
 
 ingrandire, to increase. 
 
 immalinconire, to grow mel- 
 ancholy. 
 
 immarcire, to putrefy. 
 
 innacerbire, to exasperate. 
 
 innagrestire, to become sour. 
 
 innanimire, to animate. 
 
 innaridire, to dry. 
 
 innasprire, to exasperate. 
 
 innuzzolire, to awake an ea- 
 gerness. 
 
 innorgoglire, to become proud 
 of any thing. 
 
 inorridire, to tremble with 
 horror. 
 
 inquisire, to accuse. 
 
 irretire, to catch with a net. 
 
 irrigidire, to grow stiff. 
 
 irruginire, to rust. 
 
 insalvatichire, to become wild 
 or savage. 
 
 insanire, to grow mad. 
 
 inschiavire, to enslave. 
 
 inserire, to insert. 
 
 insignire, to decorate. 
 
 insignorire, to become mas- 
 ter of. 
 
 insipidire, to become insipid. 
 
 insolentire, to become insolent. 
 
 insollire, to become soft. 
 
 insordire, to become deaf. 
 
 insospettire 9 to become sus- 
 picious. 
 
 insozzire, to dirty. 
 
 isterilire, to become barren. 
 
 istituire t to institute. 
 
 instruire, to instruct. 
 
 instupidire, to be surprised. 
 
 insuperbire, to become proud. 
 
 intenebrire y to become dark. 
 
 intenerire, to move often. 
 
 ?i #f e/? 26??>e, to grow lu ke war m . 
 
 intimidire, to intimidate. 
 
 intimorire, to frighten. 
 
 intirizzire, to grow stiff with 
 cold. 
 
 intisichire, to become con- 
 sumptive. 
 
 intorbidire, to grow muddy. 
 
 intormentire, to benumb. 
 
 intorpidire, to become sad. 
 
 intristire, to become dull. 
 
 invaghire, to charm. 
 
 invanire, to become vain. 
 
 inveire, to inveigh. 
 
LIST OF VERBS CONJUGATED LIKE UHITC. 127 
 
 invelenire,to become irritated. 
 inverminire, to grow full of 
 
 worms. 
 
 invigorire, to invigorate. 
 invilire, to dishearten. 
 invincidire, to grow soft. 
 inviperire, to rage. 
 inviscidire, to become viscid. 
 invizzire, to wither. 
 inumidire, to moisten. 
 involpire, to grow crafty. 
 inuzzolire, to awake a desire 
 
 of any thing. 
 
 inzotichire, to become rude. 
 irretire, to catch with a net. 
 irricchire, to become rich. 
 irrigidire, to become stiff. 
 irritrosire, to become shy. 
 irruginire, to become rusty. 
 istituire, to institute. 
 i&truire, to instruct. 
 largire, to give liberally. 
 lenire, to soften. 
 nitrire, to neigh. 
 obbedire, to obey. 
 0/z>e, to smell. 
 ostruire, to obstruct. 
 patire, to vilify again. 
 pattuire, to suffer. 
 piatire, to bargain. 
 polire, to plead. 
 poltrire, to polish. 
 preferire, to be idle. 
 presagire, to prefer. 
 preterire, to presage. 
 proferire, to prefer. 
 progredire, to utter. 
 proibire, to progress. 
 
 rabbellire, to prohibit. 
 rabbonire, to beautify again. 
 raddolcire, to pacify again. 
 raggentilire, to sweeten again. 
 rammollire, to make noble 
 
 again. 
 
 rammorbidire, to soften again. 
 rapire, to soften again. 
 rattepidire, to snatch away. 
 ravvilire, to cool again. 
 ravvincidire, to become soft 
 
 again. 
 
 redarguire, to argue against. 
 referire, to refer. 
 restituire, to restore. 
 r ever ire, to revere. 
 riabbcllire, to embellish again. 
 riagire, to react. 
 riarricchire, to enrich again. 
 ribadire, to rivet. 
 ribandire,.to banish again. 
 richiarire, to clear again. 
 ricolorire, to colour again. 
 riconcepire, to conceive again. 
 ricondire, to season again. 
 ricostituire, to constitute 
 
 again. 
 
 riferire, to refer again. 
 rifiorire, to flourish again. 
 rinfronssire, to bring forth 
 
 new leaves. 
 ringentilire, to become noble 
 
 again. 
 
 ringioire, to rejoice. 
 ringiovanire,to become young 
 
 again. 
 ringiovialire, to become j o vial 
 
 again. 
 
128 
 
 LIST OF VERBS CONJUGATED LIKE 
 
 ringrandire, to become great 
 
 or large again. 
 rinsavire, to become wise 
 
 again. 
 rinserenire, to become severe 
 
 again. 
 
 rinsignorire, to become mas- 
 ter again. 
 
 rintenerire,to be moved again. 
 rintiepidire, to become cool 
 
 again. 
 rinverzire, to become green 
 
 again. 
 rinvigorire, to invigorate 
 
 again. 
 
 rinvilirej to vilify again. 
 ripulire, to clean again. 
 risarcire, to make good any 
 
 loss. 
 
 risbaldire, to rejoice. 
 risquittire, to adjust again 
 
 the feathers to a bird. 
 ristecchire, to dry up. 
 ristituire y to restore. 
 ritribuire, to retribute. 
 ritrosire, to become shy. 
 riunire, to unite again. 
 sbaldanzire, to lose courage. 
 fsbalordire, to be astonished 
 
 or to astonish. 
 sbandire, to banish. 
 xbigottire, to despond. 
 sbizzarrire, to satisfy our 
 
 whims. 
 
 scalfire, to scarify. 
 scarnire, to love flesh. 
 scaturire, to spring. 
 schermire, to parry. 
 
 schernire, to ridicule. 
 schiarire, to clear. 
 schiattire, to yelp. 
 schiencire, to avoid. 
 sciapidire, to become insipid. 
 scipidire, to become insipid. 
 scipire, to become insipid. 
 scolorire, to discolour. 
 semenzire, to grow up in 
 
 seed. 
 
 seppellire, to bury. 
 sfavorire, to disfavour. 
 sfornire, to unfurnish. 
 sgarire, to get the better in 
 
 a dispute. 
 
 sghermire, to let loose. 
 sgomentire, to discourage. 
 sgradire, to displease. 
 smaltire, to digest. 
 smarrire, to lose. 
 sminuire, to diminish. 
 smunire, to- reinstate in an 
 
 office. 
 
 soptVe, to quiet. 
 sostituire, to substitute. 
 spaurire, to frighten. 
 spervertire, to pervert. 
 spessire, to thicken. 
 srugginire, to clean from rust. 
 stabilire, to establish. 
 starnutire, to sneeze. 
 statuire, to resolve. 
 stecchire, to become dry. 
 sterilire, to become barren. 
 stizzire, to be angry. 
 stordire, to stun. 
 stormire, to make a noise. 
 stramortire, to swoon. 
 
LIST OF VERBS CONJUGATED LIKE 
 
 129 
 
 stremenzire, to reduce with 
 
 difficulty. 
 
 stupidire, to wonder. 
 stupire, to wonder. 
 svanire, to vanish. 
 svelenire, to lose one's ferocity 
 svilire, to become vile. 
 supplire, to supply. 
 tradire, to betray. 
 traferire, to wound. 
 
 tramortire, to swoon. 
 
 trasferire, to transfer. 
 
 trasgredire, to transgress. 
 
 trasricchire, to become very 
 rich. 
 
 vagire, to cry as infants. 
 
 ubbidire, to obey. 
 
 usucapire, to acquire the pro- 
 perty of any thing by the 
 right of use. 
 
PART V, 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
PAKT V. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 EXERCISE I.f 
 
 ON THE ARTICLES. 
 
 1. / have always been curious to learn new things. 
 
 sono aempre stato cimoso[295j] intender nitova cosa. 
 
 2. || Gold, pearls, and rich dresses, showed truly 
 
 oro 9 per la, ricco vestimento mostrdvan veramente 
 that she was a lady of distinction. 
 che donna * grand* affare. 
 
 3. Remove from the your mind this sad thought of 
 Levdtevi da [26] animo questo tristo pensiero * 
 
 death. 
 
 morte. 
 
 2 
 
 4. / have a very great fear of the illusions of the magic 
 i Ho grandissima paura [26] inganno [26] magica 
 
 art. 
 arte. 
 
 5. These wicked witches sometimes are birds, sometimes 
 Questa malvagie strega[I5~] ora uccello, 
 
 dogs, and a little after mice and flies. 
 
 cane, poco poi topo mosca [15]. 
 
 6. His limbs were torn by (the) wild beasts. 
 Le sue membra^ straziate da [24] fiera [9]. 
 
 f The pupil must form for himself the plural of the nouns, whose 
 singular alone is given. He should also learn to conjugate the re- 
 gular verbs from the infinitives given in the text. 
 
 J The numbers within brackets refer to the sections of the Third 
 Part. 
 
 || The definite article should always be placed before a noun in 
 the nominative case. 
 
 1" Membra is plural. 
 
 The English words in italics are not to be translated. 
 
 Words under which a dash ( ) is placed must be rendered into 
 Italian either by the help of a dictionary or by what the pupil has 
 already learnt. 
 
 The words or phrases under which an asterisk (*) is placed show 
 the application of the rules. 
 
134 EXERCISES. 
 
 7. What dost tliou want I Thou hast servants, thou hast 
 Che ti manca ? fannglio, 
 
 maids, thou hast gowns of silk of every colour, rings, and 
 serva, vesta * seta ogni colore, audio 
 chains of gold, in fact (alt) that which thou desirest. 
 catena in fine cib che vuoi. 
 
 8. The Egyptians wishing to represent a man of deep 
 
 Egizio volere figurare un uomo * alti 
 thought, and given up to the contemplation of (the) 
 
 pensieri volto [34] contemplazione * 
 
 2 i 
 
 heavenly things, formed an elephant with the trunk turned 
 cosa celaste fecevano elefante [33] grugno rivolto 
 upwards ; and wishing to signify (the) prudence in the 
 in su ; significar prudenza [34] 
 things of the world, they made a serpent. 
 [33] mondo, "\figurare un serpente. 
 
 9. It is the nature of man to have compassion of (on) 
 
 Umano cosa e aver compassione [35] di 
 
 the afflicted. 
 afflitto. 
 
 10. Sorrow is placed at the extremity of (the) pleasure. 
 Dolore occupare estrcmitd * [33] piacere. 
 
 11. The sick were abandoned by (the) neighbours, 
 
 infermo abbandonare da [35] vicino, 
 
 by (the) relations, and by (the) friends. 
 da [35] parente 9 da [35] amico. 
 
 12. On the top of this little mountain was a palace with 
 Sul colmo quella montagnetta un palazzo con 
 
 a fine and large court-yard in the middle, with small fields 
 bella gran corte [33] mezzo pratello 
 
 2 i 
 
 around, and with wonderful gardens with wells of w r ater 
 
 intorno, maraviglioso giardino pozzo acqua 
 
 exceedingly fresh, and with cellars full of very precious wine. 
 
 freachissima, volta plena vino preziosissimo. 
 
 ^ ^ The Italian words are a complete translation here, and in all 
 similar cases, of all the English words above them which have no 
 mark under. 
 
THE ARTICLES. 135 
 
 13. J have the corn in the granary, and the horse in 
 
 grano * granaio cavallo 
 the stable. 
 * stalla. 
 
 31 2 
 
 14. Most (of the) men have (the) pleasure for their aim. 
 I piu * uomo\ * per fine. 
 
 15. (The sole) obedience to (the) magistrates governs 
 
 [106] obbedienza * magistrate regge 
 the world. 
 
 mondo. 
 
 16. He builds castles in the air. 
 
 Fa castello in aria. 
 
 2 i 
 
 17. The beauty of the person is really a vain thing. 
 
 bellezza corporate veramente vana cosa. 
 
 18. The weakness of the body is very often a proof 
 
 * debolezza * corpo le piu, volte argomento 
 of the strength of the mind. 
 forza spirito. 
 
 19. Abstinence is the mother of health. 
 Astinenza madre sanita. 
 
 20. The abundance of (the) dishes corrupts the body 
 
 larghezza * vivanda corrbmpere 
 and the soul. 
 
 anima. 
 
 21. God and truth will fight for me. 
 Iddio prendere Varme 
 
 22. They died not as men but as beasts. 
 
 23. The countenance is the mirror of the soul, and the 
 
 faccia [26] specchio * 
 eyes declare the secrets of the heart. 
 
 occhio [10] mostrare segreto * cuore. 
 
 f The plural of uomo is uomini. 
 
 Infinitives having this sign should be put in the imperfect in- 
 dicative. 
 
136 EXERCISES. 
 
 24. The study of Dante excites the heart to (the) virtue. 
 
 studio di Dante accendere 
 
 2 3 1 
 
 25. It is the property of a great and good mind not 
 Questo e prbprio grande e buono dnimo * 
 
 to seek for the reward of (the) benefits, hut to seek to 
 [39] cercare frutto * benefizio, ma [39] 
 
 confer them. 
 di farli. 
 
 EXERCISE II. 
 
 ON THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 1. /thank you for your offer. 
 
 ringraziare [85] delta vostra offerta. 
 
 2. I assure you that I will not depart (myself) from 
 
 promettere [85] partire * 
 the truth. 
 
 veritd. 
 
 3. Let us quit (the) jokes ; tell me, I beg of you, 
 Lasciamo andar cidncia; cftfe[86] pregarevene[Q5^ 
 
 who you are, and where you live. 
 chi , dove state a casa. 
 
 4. Thou shalt not ruin thyself alone, but me with thee. 
 
 ruinare [85] sola, ma[%o~\con 
 2 i 
 
 5. I do not understand their language, and / do not care 
 
 intendere illoro parlar, curare 
 (myself) about it. 
 
 [90] ne. 
 
 6. Tell me the cause for which thou art so angry. 
 
 D\ [97] cagione per che sz in cbllera. 
 
 7. Is it to me that thou hast given the gown with the other 
 
 A me hai data altra 
 
 things I 
 cosa? 
 
PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 137 
 
 2 1 
 
 8. You will not restore it to me. 
 
 volete renders [90] 
 
 9. I am not anxious (of) to know thee. 
 non mi euro di conoscere [87]. 
 
 10. It is the first time that you have seen me. 
 
 prima volta che vedere 
 
 11. Command me freely in all your necessities. 
 Comandate[BG'] liberamente tutta la vostraoccorrenza. 
 
 12. / parted from you very discontented, and lamenting 
 
 Partire da voi motto scontento, dolere[8G~] 
 (myself) also my fate. 
 
 ancora della mia surte. 
 
 13. / give thee (the) permission to do it. 
 
 Dare * licenza ne. 
 
 14. Do to me that which thou desirest. 
 Fare [97] quel che vuoi. 
 
 15. Thou canst believe thyself one of us. 
 
 Puoi credere uno 
 
 16. You ought to please (to) everyone, although few please 
 
 dovete piacere ognuno, sebben pochi piacciano 
 (to) you. 
 * [85] 
 
 17. Beware (yourselves) (from the) of flatterers. 
 Guardare * adulatore. 
 
 18. Let us see that as you know how to conquer (the) 
 Fare * vedere come sapere vincere * 
 
 others, so you know how to conquer yourself. 
 altro, cost [85] medesimo. 
 
 19. Believe what pleases you (you please), as for me 7 say 
 Credere che piacere, io per me dico 
 
 it for good. 
 per bene. 
 
138 EXERCISES. 
 
 20. / tell you that I am not acquainted with you, and / 
 
 Dico conoscere 
 
 know not who you are. 
 so chi siate. 
 
 21. If you loved me as I love you, you would not re- 
 Se amaste * com 9 re- 
 fuse it me. 
 
 gare [424] * 
 
 22. Help me, I pray you (of it). 
 Aiutare * * pregare ne. 
 
 23. / come (for) to entreat you, (in order) that you would 
 
 Vengo per pregare * affinche mode- 
 
 restrain yourself in the passion that transports you. 
 rare passione che trasportare. 
 
 24. Here I am, what do you command me ? 
 [88]* [211] comandare ? 
 
 EXERCISE IH.f 
 ON ST, &c. 
 
 1. In compensation of (for} so troublesome an affair, they 
 
 Per guiderdone cost faticosa faccenda [102] 
 2 i 
 
 never give more than the worth of six crowns. 
 mai J dare piu che valore sei scudi. 
 
 2. One can only lose. 
 [102] pub se non perdere. 
 
 3. What are they doing \ Where are they going ! 
 Che [102] Dove * va 
 
 4. / wish to go and see what they do there. 
 
 Vbglio andare a vedere quel che [102] [364] 
 
 t For the rules on si, &c., see pronominal particles, pages 54 & 55. 
 $ When a negative follows the verb, the word non is always placed 
 before the verb. 
 
ON THE USE OF SI AND SE. 139 
 
 5. It is here that we have made the acquisition of the 
 
 Qui acquisto 
 
 picture which is sent you. 
 quadro [101] mandare * 
 
 6. Men do not talk of any thing (men talk of nothing) but 
 
 * parlare d'altro che 
 
 of peace. 
 
 2 i 
 
 7. They have spoken so much of you, that all the hill 
 [102] 4 parlare tanto tutto poggio 
 
 re-echoed with it. 
 risonare ne. 
 
 3 12 456 
 
 8. There the birds are heard to sing, there the hills and 
 Quivi uccello[IQl~]6donocantare ) [3G4:~] collina 
 
 7812 3 
 
 the meadows are seen blooming, and the fields full of 
 pianura veggono verdeggiare, campo pieno 
 corn to wave not otherwise than (like) the sea. 
 biada ondeggiare mare. 
 
 9. Passions, said Galen, are like the stones which 
 passione, dice Galeno, * sasso che 
 
 from the top of a mountain roll towards the foot ; 
 
 * sommo rotolare allo ingiu ; 
 
 as soon as a man has taken a direction towards evil, he is no 
 
 come uno preso la corsa 
 more able to stop himself. 
 piu pub fermare * 
 
 10. Throughout (all the) life, one should learn to live 
 
 In tutta [1^2] debbe imparare 
 
 and to die. 
 morire. 
 
 11. We unlearn with difficulty that which we have 
 [102] disimparare malagevolmente quel che 
 
 learned in our tender years. 
 la eta tenera. 
 
140 EXERCISES. 
 
 12. We should keep our promise. 
 
 * dee osservare la promessa. 
 
 345 2 1 
 
 13. One can refuse thee nothing. 
 pud disdire niente. 
 
 14. They do them no injustice if they are treated (so) 
 
 fa loro alcuna ingiuria se trattare si 
 as they have treated the others. 
 come essi hanno trattato * altro. 
 
 15. There is no crime so hidden which is not discovered 
 Non v* e reita si nascosta * scuopra 
 
 and which is not known. Let the smallest cracks beclosed, 
 
 * sappia. Chiudansi minima fessura, 
 
 let every light be taken away, the evil which thou doest at the 
 
 tolgasi ogni lume, 
 
 first crowing of the cock is known before daylight by the 
 
 primo cantar gallo sapere prima del d\ da 
 
 nearest publicans. 
 
 pi u prossimo taverniere. 
 
 16. What can one say more 2 
 Che pub '" dire piu ? 
 
 32 1 
 
 17. They work at it day and night. 
 
 * lavorare * di notte. 
 
 18. They cannot deny it. 
 
 * * negare * 
 
 19. What would people say of you if you did it \ 
 Che [102] direbbe se ilfaceste ? 
 
 2 i 
 
 20. When an impossibility is asked, it is lawful 
 Quando cosa impossibile domandare, licito 
 
 to refuse it. 
 * la disdire. 
 
 21 . They are called geese. 
 [101] chiamare paper a. 
 
ADJECTIVES. 141 
 
 341 2 
 
 22. Many more of them were sung. 
 Piu altre [82] cantare. 
 
 2 3 
 
 23. It is not three days since the words and the music 
 Non sono tre giorno che * parola suono 
 
 i 
 
 were composed. 
 fecero. 
 
 2 i 
 
 24. We should not (have) fear (of) that which is not yet 
 [102] vuole * paura quel che ancora 
 
 arrived. 
 intervenuto. 
 
 25. It is a thing which has never been seen. 
 
 una cosa [101 niai veduta. 
 
 EXERCISE IV. 
 
 THE ADJECTIVES. 
 
 1. Hear what she did in presence of many persons. 
 Udire quelch* fece cospetto molto persona. 
 
 2 i 
 
 2. Thinkest thou that I ought to suffer so great an 
 Pensare ch 9 iodebba patire tanto [108] 
 
 affront * 
 villania ? 
 
 3. He gave me so many blows, that he was near 
 
 Dare tanto bastonata, che fu presso 
 killing me. 
 
 che per ammazzare 
 
 2 i 
 
 4. Seest thou not with how much arrogance and 
 Vedere con [108] arroganza 
 
 pride she behaves towards us ? 
 superbia portarsi con 
 
142 EXERCISES. 
 
 5. If thou hast a little patience, I will show thee 
 Se avrai * * * pazienza fare vedere 
 
 all. 
 tutto. 
 
 6. It is not surprising that we hear so much noise. 
 
 Non e maravlglia che sentire romore. 
 
 7. How many times have I not told you to do it in 
 
 volta non detto chefacciatea 
 this manner I 
 modo suo? 
 
 8. You give him too many caresses. 
 
 fare gli carezza. 
 
 9. Pray, have a little patience and let me finish. 
 Di grazia 9 [110]* *pazienssa 9 lasciare * finire. 
 
 10. / have been greeted on your part many times, and 
 
 salutare da parte vostra 
 by many of your friends. 
 
 da * [332] vostro amico. 
 
 11. I make little account of it. 
 
 Fare * stima [82]. 
 
 1 2. They had little hope in peace. 
 
 * speranza la pace. 
 
 13. A good conscience is always tranquil. 
 La coscienza buono sempre sicuro. 
 
 14. Glory makes many envious. 
 Gloria fare * invidioso. 
 
 15. Slanderers are hateful to God and to men. 
 Detrattore odioso 
 
 16. She is beautiful, rich, good, and witty. 
 
 bello, ricco, savio, spiritoso. 
 
 17. He found there a respectable woman, very aged. 
 
 Trovare quivi uno buono molto^ attempato. 
 
 t Molto followed by an adjective is always an adverb, and is 
 therefore unchangeable in its termination. 
 
ADJECTIVES. 145 
 
 2 1 
 
 18. I see in your bright eyes a sweet calm which 
 
 Vedere nei vostri lucente bechio dolce serenitd che 
 ought to he an image of that which the blessed enjoy in 
 debbe immagine quella che beato godere 
 (the) heaven. 
 cielo. 
 
 21 234 
 
 19. She had (the) lively eyes, (the) a fair and calm 
 
 vivace candido sereno 
 
 21 21 
 
 forehead, (the) rosy cheeks, (the) a ruddy mouth, and 
 di rose gudncia, vermiglio 
 
 (the) teeth white as ivory. 
 
 bianco [107] come avorio. 
 
 20. Oh ! how many times / laugh at it to myself. 
 
 fiata risi ne fra stesso. 
 2 
 
 21 . In the midst of that field was a fountain of very white 
 
 mezzo delqualprato fonte bianchzssimo 
 
 i 2 
 
 marble, and with extraordinary carved work. 
 marmOy maraviglioso intaglio. 
 
 22. If thou desirest to avenge thyself, be silent, and thou 
 
 vuoi vendicare tarn, hai 
 
 givest a mortal wound to thine enemy. 
 dato piaga mortale al nemico. 
 
 23. Your sister is polite, good, and also generous as you. 
 Vostrosorella cortese,buono, cosl liber ale come 
 
 2 i 
 
 24. Do you prefer the flaxen hair of Lauretta, or the 
 Pidccionvi piu biondo capello - 
 
 black of Lisetta ! 
 nero - 
 
 25. Poor girl, who has beaten you I 
 Povero figliuola, chi dare 
 
144 
 EXERCISE V. 
 
 ON THE COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES. 
 
 1. In good faith, if thou dost not change, I shall burn 
 Inbuonafe, se mutare verso, bruciar 
 
 thee alive. 
 
 viva viva [136]. 
 
 2. There is not a woman in the world who is happier than 
 
 NOM che siafelice [128] 
 
 she. 
 lei. 
 
 3. This time I have been more cunning than thee. 
 Questa io n 9 ho saputopiu [128] 
 
 4. Now J deny it more than ever. 
 Ora lonegare [128] mai. 
 
 5. 7 wish to be able to love thee as much as thou lovest me. 
 
 Vorrei potere amar * [124] * 
 
 6. / went immediately to visit him, and he gave (made) me 
 
 subito a visitarlo, 
 a very agreeable reception. 
 
 lieta [133] accoglienza. 
 
 7. He could not do any thing which deserved more 
 
 Potere cosa che meritasse [109] 
 blame, and less excuse ; and the excuses which he makes 
 bidsimo, [109] sense; che allegare 
 are more unworthy than the fact itself. 
 
 brutto [128] stesso. 
 
 8. / will do willingly as much as you set me. 
 
 volentieri [124] * imponete 
 
 9. 1 have never wished for any thing so much as to study 
 
 desiderare cosaalcuna * [39^studiare 
 two years in my own manner. 
 
 due anno a mio modo. 
 
COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES. 145 
 
 10. If it were so, I should fear greatly for your safety, 
 Secib fosse dubitare forte delta vostra salute, 
 
 and so much the more as the relapse would be much more 
 
 * ricaduta 
 dangerous than the malady itself. 
 
 pericoloso malattia stesso. 
 
 2 i 
 
 11. The splendour of beauty is more fugitive than are (not) 
 
 splendors bellezza fuggevole * D29] 
 
 the flowers, which appear in the spring. 
 
 fiore, ch' appdiono a primavera. 
 
 12. Learning makes (the) men better. 
 Dottrinafare [132]. 
 
 13. What (thing) is sweeter than this law ! To abstain 
 Quale soave * questolegge? Astenersi 
 
 from (the) wickedness, to wish/or what is good (the good), not 
 
 malvagitd volere bene 
 
 to wish for (the) evil, (not) to hate no one, not to be willing 
 
 odiare nessuno, volere 
 (to be unwilling) to do to others that which you would not 
 
 fare altro quello ch 9 uno 
 wish for yourself. 
 vorrebbe a se. 
 
 14. It is more difficult to know how to be silent, than 
 
 malagevole * saper tacere, 
 how to speak well. 
 
 parlare 
 
 2 
 
 15. Nothing charms (the) man so much as (the) faithful 
 Niunacosa dilettare * 
 
 3 1 
 
 and sweet friendship. 
 amistd. 
 
 16. It is easier to reply to abuse than not to reply to 
 
 agevole ingiurie * rispbndere 
 it. 
 
146 EXEKCISES. 
 
 17. The love of the money increases as much as 
 
 amore danaro crescere 
 the money increases. 
 
 1 8. Who is more exalted than he w r ho despises (the) 
 Chi eccellente * coluiche disprezzare 
 
 money I 
 
 2 i 
 
 19. Hidden pleasures are worth as much as (the) 
 Nascoso diletto vdgliono 
 
 treasures buried in the earth. 
 tesoro occultato sotto 
 
 20. The tie of (the) friendship binds much more than 
 
 legame amicizia stringere 
 
 that of blood or of (the) relationship. 
 
 q ue l parentado. 
 
 21. Is it not a degradation of a son to wish to raise a 
 un abbassare ilfiglmolo voler alzare 
 
 (the) slave almost higher than him I Certainly it is. 
 schiavo quasi su * lui ? Certo che St. 
 
 3 12 
 
 22. We bear (the) hatred more easily than the 
 Si sostiene bdio 
 
 society of the wicked and (of the) foolish. 
 compagnia * reo matto. 
 
 2 i 
 
 23. The wicked man does more evil than the brute. 
 
 rio fa * bestia. 
 
 24. Perhaps he did not love me so much as he declared. 
 Forse amare cost * mostrare. 
 
 25. Who is he that can know it better than I ? 
 Chi quegli lo conosca 
 
 26. The woman, so feeble asshe was, could not save herself. 
 
 __ [I23]debole * potere fuggire. 
 
147 
 EXERCISE VI. 
 
 ON THE AUGMENTATIVES AND DIMINUTIVES. 
 
 1. He has a nasty livid colour, and is so thin that one 
 
 un[\4&~\ color e livido, simagroche 
 2 i 
 
 can only see his skin and (his) bones. 
 se non gli vedere la osso. 
 
 3 4 
 
 2. Why do you sell these little fish so dear ! 
 Perche venders questo (etto) pesce si caro ? 
 
 3. She was a charming young girl of the age of 
 
 ' f unaleggiadra (etto) gibvane d'eta 
 fifteen years. 
 
 anno. 
 
 2 i 
 
 4. The other was a little child, who was not yet 
 
 altro * un (ino) fanciullo, che aveva ancora 
 a year (old). 
 
 5. She is naturally very agreeable. 
 Ella naturalmente piacevolina. 
 
 6. For how long shall we endure this vile animal ? 
 Insino a quanta sosterremo questo * animate? 
 
 7. Be still, foolish chatterer! what nonsense thou art say ing 
 Sta cheto y accio cicala ! che pazzia did tu. 
 
 8. / am well persuaded (myself) that this is a little 
 
 avvisto che costei una(erello) 
 
 foolish girl. 
 sciocca.^ 
 
 9. What sweet little words did she say to me ! 
 Che dolce (ino] parola disse 
 
 t The diminutive of sciocca is schioccherella. 
 
148 EXERCISES. 
 
 10. I am determined to ridicule this great fool. 
 
 deliberare dar la bdia a questo (one] sciocco. 
 
 11. They see here a frightful comet ; hut it does not 
 
 vedere qui una accio cometa; ma non 
 appear to me that it can signify any thing of consequence. 
 pare che possa significar cosa momento. 
 2 I 
 
 12. They found nothing else to eat, save a few 
 
 trovare non altro da mangiare, che alcuna 
 2 i 
 
 wild little apples. 
 salvatico (uzzo) mela. 
 
 13. He went away near to the little tower. 
 
 Sene andb vicino a (icello) torre. 
 
 14. (Not) having but one small chamber, and one single 
 Non che (etta) camera, 
 
 little bed, / cannot lodge you. 
 (icello) ktto, posso alloggiare 
 
 15. This great dunce wishes me to learn (the) 
 Questo (one) [143] pecora vuol *fare conoscere 
 
 things, as if I was born yesterday. 
 come s' iofossi nata ieri. 
 
 16. Thou hast so fascinated me by thy sparkling 
 
 in modo abbagliare co' tuoi sfavillante 
 little eyes, that / am become thy slave. 
 
 (etto) bcchio, che sonofatto tuo schiavo. 
 
 17. A good little fellow was gardener of their 
 Un buono (icciolo) uomo ortolano del loro 
 
 garden. [147] 
 
 giardino. 
 
 18. When he opens his great eyes, he appears 
 Quando spalancare quegli * occhio pare 
 
 (like) one possessed. 
 uno spiritato. 
 
AUGMENTATIVES AND DIMINUTIVES. 149 
 
 19. He drew from one pocket a little letter, and gave 
 
 Si trasse unatasca una (ino) letter a rese 
 it me on your part. 
 da vostra parte. 
 
 20. This place was on a little hill. 
 
 II detto luogo sopra una (etta) montagna. 
 
 21. She went to a little country-house near there. 
 andarsene (etta) villa vicino ivi 
 
 22. My child, thouartnow old enough, it is 
 Figliuol mio, se 9 oggimaigrande (icello), egli 
 
 right that thou shouldst "begin thyself to see the state 
 benfatto incominei medesimo vedere 
 of thy affairs. 
 de' tuoifatti. 
 
 23. She saw on the shore a little fishing - boat, 
 
 Vide alia riva una (icello) nave dipescatori, 
 without oars and without sail. 
 senza remo vela. 
 
 24. I shall consider thee as a great fool. 
 avere peruno (one) sciocco. 
 
 25. He slept in a poor little hed. 
 
 Dormire pbvero (icciuolo) letto. 
 
 EXERCISE VII. 
 
 ON THE NUMBERS. 
 
 1. Return in three or four hours. 
 Tornarefra or a. 
 
 2. He has given me a pretty gown, a chain which ought 
 
 vesta, che dee 
 
 to cost (must have cost} forty crowns, a ruhy which is worth 
 valere scudo, che vale 
 
150 EXERCISES. 
 
 ten (of them), and a wreath which ought to be worth 
 
 ne, che valere 
 
 (is worth) as much. 
 altrettanto. 
 
 3. I have written (wrote) to him from Paris the 1 5th of 
 
 scritto gli * Parigi[16&] 
 
 (the) last month. 
 
 4. Three times three make nine. 
 
 [362] fan 
 
 5. The first odd number is (the) three ; the first even 
 
 cqffo pari 
 
 number is (the) two. 
 
 6. The city (inhabitants) of Florence were the (one) same 
 - - [169] 
 
 people with the Romans. 
 pbpelo co 9 Romani. 
 
 7. / give you two thousand florins of gold (gold florins) 
 
 _____ [161] fiorino 
 for it. 
 ne. 
 
 8. They have seated themselves all five on the grass, 
 
 posti a sedere sopra 
 near (to) the fountain. 
 presso a fontana. 
 
 9. She scattered all the walnuts in the hall, then she 
 
 Fare versare noce per sala, poi 
 
 made them pick them up one by one. 
 
 gliele ricogliere * [168] 
 
 2 i 
 
 10. They made in the burial-grounds very large trenches, 
 
 * cimitero grandefossa, 
 
 2 i 
 
 in (the) which the dead were put by hundreds. 
 
 quale morto mettere [168] centindia. 
 
NUMBERS. 151 
 
 11. None of them had exceeded twenty-eight years, nor 
 
 loro passato il ventottesimo anno, ne 
 was less than eighteen. 
 era minor . 
 
 12. He held firmly with (the) his two hands the edges 
 
 Tenere forte orlo 
 of the chest. 
 
 13. The first punishment of (the) crime is to have 
 pena delitto 
 
 committed it ; the second, always to fear ; the third, the 
 commesso temere; 
 disgrace ; the fourth, to lose the sight of God. 
 infdmia; perdere il veder Dio. 
 
 14. When Jupiter created the first men, he made them 
 Quando Giove creare egli li 
 
 with four legs and two heads. 
 , gamba testa. 
 
 15. William the Second, king of Sicily, had two children, 
 Guglielmo [163] Sicilia, figliuolo, 
 
 the one called Roger, the other called Constance. 
 chiamare Ruggieri, Costanza. 
 
 16. Let the ladies take each other by the hand two and 
 
 donna tengano per 
 
 two. 
 
 
 
 17. If he gives you two hundred francs for each, you 
 Se uno, 
 
 ought to be more than satisfied. 
 dovere contento. 
 
 18. He loved them all three alike. 
 
 amare parimente. 
 
 19. I shall live with him as a wife ought to live with 
 
 Dimorare lui mbglie dee 
 her husband. 
 
152 EXERCISES. 
 
 20. The other is a stone, which we (other) lapidaries 
 pietra, lapiddrio 
 
 call heliotrope. 
 appellare elitrbpia* 
 
 21. Although I have not a thousand (florins), I had a 
 Perche abbia mille 
 
 good hundred, and even two hundred to give you. 
 ben anche * da dare 
 
 22. He had a brother of (the) age of twenty-five years. 
 
 fratello d'eta 
 
 23. Bet five thousand florins of gold against a thousand. 
 Metier e fiorino oro contra a 
 
 24. 7 shall depart the tenth of this month. 
 
 Partire * questo 
 
 25. Walk four and four. 
 Andare [168] 
 
 EXERCISE VIII. 
 
 ON THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 1. /should have recognised him another time at a distance ; 
 
 conbscere altra voltada lungi; 
 however, / stopped then a little time in doubt, thinking if 
 pure stare un pezzo sopra di me, pensare se 
 
 it were he himself. 
 fosse * [66] 
 
 2. This, my sister, is my beloved 
 [253] * diletto. 
 
 3. Lucy, take the bag of this gentleman, and lock 
 Lucia, pigliare valigia [245] serrare 
 
 it in that little chamber. 
 [245] * camera. 
 
PRONOUNS. 1 53 
 
 4. My host desires that I be (wishes me to be) with him, 
 
 * ospite vuole seco 9 
 
 and I have promised it to him. 
 [92] 
 
 5. He no more appears himself. 
 
 pare [66] 
 
 6. When have you known this man ? 
 Dove [252] 
 
 7. Have pity on her who dies for your sake. 
 
 pitta di [252] muore per vostra cagione. 
 
 8. / do not give her to him. 
 
 dare * [92] 
 
 9. If you wish to know it, I will tell it you. 
 Se volere sapere * dirb [90] 
 
 10. This man is not whom he appeared to be. 
 
 [253] [213] parere 
 
 11. / love her exceedingly, and / am beloved by her. 
 
 [85] sommamente, 
 
 12. /do not wish to importune you any more. 
 
 vbglio importunare [87] altrimenti. 
 
 13. Let us go to meet them. 
 
 incontro a [83] 
 
 3 1 2 
 
 14. What shall we do with this man, said one to the other. 
 [211] farem di [252] dicevaVuno 
 
 15. Nobody would desire to live without friends, although 
 
 vorrebbe vwere amico, anche 
 possessing all (the) other advantages. 
 avendo bene. 
 
 16. Am I not as handsome as she I 
 [123] * * 
 
 17. You cannot refuse it to him. 
 
 potere negare * [92] 
 
154 EXERCISES. 
 
 18. If / was her, I would not do it. 
 Se /cww[72] /are [84] 
 
 19. You have deserved it as well as he. 
 
 meritare [123] * * 
 
 20. The wicked are never pleased with themselves. 
 
 reo mai godere di se stessi. 
 
 21. The bird called cuckoo sounds always its own name, 
 
 uccellodetto cuculo cantare [243] 
 
 but one does not listen to it with pleasure, and it is abused 
 
 * ode * volentieri, beffare 
 by the other birds : such is he who praises himself. 
 
 da cosi colui lodare se stesso. 
 
 22. The mouth of him who tells lies kills the soul. 
 
 bocca colui [181] mente uccidere 
 
 23. This (woman) said that Emily was (is) not handsome, 
 [252] diceva Emilia 
 
 and I said that she was. 
 diceva di si. 
 
 24. This woman, hearing that, said, Well, how shall 
 [252] * udire disse, Or bene, 
 
 we act \ 
 fare? 
 
 25. That (woman) merits thy love as much as every 
 [252] meritare [232] * qualtinque 
 
 other (woman) who pleases thee more 
 
 [181] pidcque mai. 
 
155 
 EXERCISE IX. 
 
 ON THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 2 1 
 
 1. Who will believe that he says probable things! (i.e. what 
 [185] credere che dica verisimile 
 
 is probable). 
 
 2. What is it I hear ! 
 [185] sentire? 
 
 2 i 
 
 3. Of what dost thou complain ? What dost thou want ? 
 [185] rammaricare? * ti manca? 
 
 Speak. 
 Parlare. 
 
 4. Some had been bitten by a dog, others wounded by a 
 [213] morso da * ferire da 
 
 stone ; these had received a blow in one place, those in 
 sasso; chi riccvere luogo, chi 
 another. 
 
 5. Here is the man by whom we are abused. 
 
 Ecco da [214] bejfare. 
 
 6. The scholar who, at the beginning of the night, had hidden 
 
 scolare che, in sulfur della notte, nascoso 
 himself near to the tower, felt compassion for this woman. 
 pressoa sentire compassione 
 
 7. What horse have you ever seen without a head ! 
 [185] cavallo vedeste mai 
 
 8. What do we here I 
 
 * facciam 
 
 9. No w is arrived the time when thou canst have hisfriendship. 
 Ora venire che puoi * 
 
 K 
 
156 EXERCISES. 
 
 2 1 
 
 10. The man who knows virtue least fears the less (of) 
 
 * conbscere temere 
 to do wrong. 
 
 errare. 
 
 11. The man who perceives not (the) dangers runs 
 
 non iscorge scbrrere 
 
 2 
 fearlessly everywhere ; and the man who can lose 
 
 baldanzosamente pub perdere 
 
 i 
 
 nothing is almost always at play. 
 quasi sempre giuoco. 
 
 12. "We have no other aim than the usefulness of our 
 
 fine utilitd 
 disciples. 
 
 2 i 
 33. Human life is a market ; some sell, others 
 
 _ _ mercato; [213] * * 
 
 huy ; some do one thing, some another ; some weary 
 comprare; * * affaticare 
 
 themselves here, others vex themselves there. What does 
 qua, affannare [185] fa 
 
 the philosopher 1 He looks on and examines. 
 Osservare sta a vedere. 
 
 14. Madman ! What is (the) sleep if not the image of 
 Stolto! [185] _ _ 
 
 (the) death 1 
 
 15. Plato says that the words should he as the 
 Platone dice deono secondo 
 
 things of which one speaks. 
 [214]- - 
 
 16. What thing is more wondrous and (more) beautiful 
 
 [211] maravigRoso bello 
 than (the) truth I 
 
RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 157 
 
 17. You do not know the danger in which you are. 
 
 conbscere [214] "~~ 
 
 18. To what would that serve you \ (Of what use would 
 [185] servire 
 
 that be to you ?) 
 
 19. Oh! my dear friend, what words are those which thou 
 Deh! dnima, * [245] 
 
 sayest ? 
 d\? 
 
 20. What was the cause for which you were angry with 
 
 * cagione [214] turbarsi 
 him \ 
 
 lui? 
 
 21 . What is this thing which you have made me eat \ 
 
 * questa che fatta mangiare? 
 
 22. You did that which a disloyal and wicked knight 
 
 fare quello disleale malvagio cavalier 
 should do. 
 
 23. Who could answer to thy wise words ! 
 [185] sapere rispbndere * [232] sdvio parola? 
 
 24. I shall reveal to thee as to a father that which 
 
 palesare come * [255] 
 / have always concealed from every one. 
 celare a tutti. 
 
158 
 EXERCISE X. 
 
 ON THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 2 1 
 
 1. Thou hast made more account of a momentary pleasure 
 
 conto momentaneo 
 
 than of thy house and of thy children. 
 * * [232] cam * [232] figliuolo. 
 
 2. I went to the house of Laura (Laura's house) with 
 
 a casa di Laura 
 two of my servants. 
 * famiglio. 
 
 3. Tell me your name. 
 Dite * nome, 
 
 4. Will you that I (do you wish me to) tell you my 
 
 Volere che dica 
 
 opinion. 
 opinione. 
 
 6. If my sad fate has decreed that she shall not be to 
 
 Se * trista sorte disposto ch 9 ella sia 
 me, it is however better that my friend have her. 
 mia 9 egli e pur che Vdbbia. 
 
 6. My nephew is entirely yours (at your service). 
 
 * nipote tulto 
 
 7. She is and always will be the queen of my soul. 
 Ella signora * 
 
 8. / have sent to call him by one of my servants. 
 
 mandarea chiamare per * [24:l^servitore. 
 
 9. / have heard say that the house is no more (longer) 
 
 sentire dire che 
 vours. 
 
 [233] 
 
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 159 
 
 10. Shall we not deserve the affection of our children, 
 
 meritare affetto * 
 for whom we do not hesitate to expose ourselves to death 1 
 per > dubitare mcttere * morte? 
 
 11. In all the time of his life (during his lifetime) he had 
 spazio * 
 
 but one (only) child. 
 altrocheun figliulo. 
 
 12. A certain Momus, not being able in other things (re- 
 Un certo Momo potere 
 
 spects) to find fault with the beautiful Venus, blamed 
 
 colpare Venere 9 biusimare 
 one of her sandals. 
 * pianella. 
 
 13. You have increased my desire and my courage. 
 
 accresciuta la vbglia mia Vanimo mio. 
 
 3 1 
 
 14. Do you know ifAehas taken my advice in good 
 
 2 Saperese dbbia pigliare * configlio per bene 
 or in bad part 1 
 per male? 
 
 15. When she saw her son, she ran affectionately to 
 Come vide * corse affettuosamente ad 
 
 embrace him. 
 abbracciarlo. 
 
 16. Let the horse be yours and the woman mine. 
 
 * donna * 
 
 17. Your husband, how does he call himself ! ( What is 
 
 chiamare - 
 your husband's name ? 
 
 2 
 
 18. / have shown you my misery and my grief, do your 
 
 mostrare * * dolor e, ilpiacer 
 
 3 1 
 
 pleasure of (with) me. 
 vostro 
 
160 EXERCISES. 
 
 19. Let me do it, for certainly I will arrange 
 Lasciare fare a me,che fermamente acconciare 
 
 your business and mine. 
 * fatti 
 
 20. You ought to know that my father left me a rich 
 
 dovete sapere * lasciare ricco 
 man. 
 uomo. 
 
 21. 7 had formerly one of my neighbours, who, with the 
 
 __ gia vicino, al 
 
 greatest injustice in the world, did nothing else but beat 
 maggior torto del mondo altro che battere 
 his wife. 
 la mbglie. 
 
 22. If thou hast not that intention which thy words 
 Se quello animo * parola 
 
 declare, feed me not with vain hopes. 
 dimostrare, pdscere [387] di vano speranza. 
 
 23. These things are (belong*) to me, and I do not sell 
 Le cosa mie, venders 
 
 them. 
 
 24. / know that you have honoured my mother, and 
 
 So che onorata * 
 
 assisted my unfortunate father. 
 aiutare * miser o 
 
 25. One of my neighbours (fern.) has told me that this 
 
 detto che questo 
 
 house belongs to you. 
 * 
 
161 
 
 EXERCISE XI. 
 
 ON THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 1. What means this? 
 Che vuol dire do ? J 
 
 2. At that moment when I was listening what|| that could 
 
 In quello che ascollare quelche potesse 
 be, the house suddenly became filled with constables. 
 aduntratto empirsi di birro. 
 
 2 1 
 
 3. Cease these useless tears, and think on your safety 
 Lasciare [245] pensare alia salute 
 
 and (to) mine. 
 
 4. You do not know these rascals. 
 
 conbscere ribaldo. 
 
 5. Go and put off these clothes. 
 a cavarvi * panni. 
 
 6. What is this parcel which you have under the arm ? 
 Che fardello wtto? 
 
 7. Have you need of me in this affair I 
 
 bisogno faccenda ? 
 
 8. Hast thou at last finished this dialogue without 
 
 ancor finire * ruyionamento senza 
 conclusion \ 
 conclusione ? 
 
 9. You will have at last that which you desire. 
 
 infine quel desid&rare. 
 
 J Cio means this or that thing. 
 
 |) What, meaning that which, should be translated by quel che. 
 
162 EXERCISES. 
 
 10. / know that you are not her whom I desired. 
 
 Conbscere che quella che 
 
 11. At the moment, as I was going to seal this letter, 
 In quello, che era per sigillar * 
 
 / received yours of the 20th current. 
 ho ricevuta * del corrente. 
 
 12. Where have you been this morning 1 
 Dove [247] 
 
 13. To-night it will he cooler, and thou wilt sleep better. 
 
 fare fresco, dormire 
 
 14. /should not have known what to do, if you had not 
 
 sapere che cosa se foste ^ 
 come at that moment. 
 venire in quella [251]. 
 
 15. Pray, do us this pleasure. 
 Di grazia, * piacere. 
 
 16. / tell .you that this (thing) does not belong to you. 
 
 dico che 
 
 17. At this moment your brother arrived with his wife. 
 
 In quella * giunse la mbglie. 
 
 18. Thou wilt lay up this distaff which I leave here. 
 
 riporre rocca ch* io lasciare qui. 
 
 19. /went to Rome to see all those famous antiquities. 
 Andare Roma per vedere * antichitd. 
 
 20. Why are you come out so early this morning ! 
 Perche uscire si per tempo 
 
 21. /received your second letter, at the moment when I 
 
 Avere * in quella ch 9 io 
 was going out. 
 era per uscire. 
 
 22. He complains of that woman, and murmurs against 
 
 lamentarsi - - mormorare contro 
 
 her. 
 a lei. 
 
THE WORDS TUTTO AND OGNI. 163 
 
 23. Give me this book or that, it is immaterial. 
 Dare * * * tan? e. 
 
 24. The ladies will remain in this garden, and we will go 
 
 donna restare * 
 
 into that thicket. 
 * boschetto. 
 
 25. May this traitor he taken. 
 
 traditore preso. 
 
 EXERCISE XII. 
 
 ON THE WORDS TUTTO AND OGNI. 
 
 1. There was no one in the house but this 
 Non era altra persona casa che quella 
 
 girl. 
 fanciulla. 
 
 2. Thou must be some fool. 
 
 debbi [266] sciocco. 
 
 3. 7 will give him all the caresses that I can. 
 
 Fare gli carezza che potrb. 
 
 4. If you wish that I should write something to you, give 
 Se volere che scrwere 
 
 me a subject to write to you. 
 * materia da * 
 
 2 i 
 
 5. All men naturally desire knowledge. 
 Tutti\ gli uomini naturalmente desiderare sapere. 
 
 6. When / arrived here there was no one. 
 Quando arrivare qui c'era [268] 
 
 7. Nobody is more unfortunate than he. 
 
 misero * lui. 
 
 t Tutto is followed by an article. 
 
164 EXERCISES. 
 
 8. He has more likeness to (with) the vilest animal, 
 
 somigtianza vile 
 whatever it may be, than to (with) a man. 
 [219] 
 
 9. There is nothing in the world that can please him. 
 Non e . che possa piacergli. 
 
 10. He has features formed in such a manner that one 
 
 un volto fatto a un modo che * 
 
 can trace there neither shame, nor fear, nor any other passion 
 
 conbscere '' ne vergogna, paura - affetto 
 
 whatever. 
 
 11. No force can hend him. 
 [267]/or#a pub piegare lo. 
 
 12. No neighbour had (any} care of the other. 
 cura 
 
 13. This shows nothing. 
 Questo montare 
 
 14. It agrees with no man to do that which nature 
 
 Conviene a * fare quello che 
 refuses him. 
 negare gli. 
 
 ? * 
 
 15. Every place is the country of the wise man. 
 
 * savio 
 
 16. He who follows every road, whatever it may be, never 
 Colui che tiene * via, 
 
 reaches (to) any place. 
 perviene 
 
 17. Take good care that no person touches my things. 
 
 Guardare bene che toccare le cose mie. 
 
 18. Allmenfeel naturally the desire of (the) knowledge, 
 sentire desiderio scienza, 
 
THE WORDS TUTTO AND OGNI. 165 
 
 because it is the ultimate perfection of our soul, and 
 
 perch 9 essa ultimo, perfezione dell' anima nostra, 
 
 it is in it that is placed our final happiness. 
 in essa sta F ultima nostra felicitd. 
 
 19. God leaves not any evil unpunished, although it be 
 - lasciare impunito, sebbene 
 
 not punished when one (man) desires it. 
 punito quando desiderare * 
 
 20. The young man listened attentively, and answered 
 
 giovinetto ascolture diligentemente, rispose 
 that he would do nothing. 
 che ne volea 
 
 21. Each one entreated his father for himself. 
 
 [257] pregare il se. 
 
 22. Every mother was the nurse of her children. 
 
 bdlia dei suoi fyliuolo. 
 
 3 2 1 
 
 23. Some were of a more cruel opinion. 
 [268] crudele sentimento. 
 
 24. Every man of whatever age made rejoicings, and 
 [256] di qualunque eta fare * festa, 
 
 in like manner the ladies, by singing songs of love. 
 similmente donne, can tare verso amore. 
 
 25. Nobody better than you knows the truth of that 
 
 * sa vero quello 
 which they say. 
 [102] dire. 
 
166 
 EXERCISE XIII. 
 
 ON THE PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 1. I went from home about the beginning of the night. 
 
 Uscire di casa quasi in sulfarsi sera. 
 
 2. It appeared properly a robber's station. 
 
 Parere prbprio ladro * stanza [322]. 
 
 3. She did things beyond belief. 
 
 * da non credere. 
 
 4. "What hast thou against me since this morning \ 
 
 con [321] 
 
 5. He is a man fit for nothing he is stupidity itself. 
 
 dappocagine stessa. 
 
 6. If my return is not in ten days, it will not take place 
 * ritornosara [346] avrdluogo 
 
 for some time. 
 per un pezzo. 
 
 7. They are men of a dull understanding. 
 
 grosso ingegno. 
 
 8. We have had so many blows that for many less an ass 
 
 * bussa assai 
 would go from hence to Rome. 
 
 - [318] 
 
 9. He who desires not to be loved by you is not a man. 
 
 10. She had been brought up from her infancy in continual 
 
 * allevare 
 
 fatigues. 
 
PREPOSITIONS. 167 
 
 11. Many maladies cure themselves without the help 
 
 * guariscono da se opera 
 
 of (the) doctors. 
 medico. 
 
 12. / will lead you to her, and / am sure that she will 
 
 condurre [325] certo conb- 
 
 recognise you. 
 scere 
 
 13. / swear to you as an honest man that / have not seen 
 
 [326] vedere 
 it. 
 
 14. He has given orders to one of his servants to give you 
 
 comandare * 
 
 (something) to eat. 
 [328] * _ 
 
 15. Whatever power she have she can not injure me. 
 
 [342] potere nubcere 
 
 16. Stand still, for the love of God. 
 State cheto, [336] 
 
 17. (The) gratitude, among the other virtues, is extremely 
 
 gratitudine, * sommamente 
 praiseworthy. 
 * lodare. 
 
 18. Diogenes the cynic used to say that the money of the 
 Dibgene cinico diceva danari 
 
 2 i 
 
 covetous was like (to the) wild figs which grow on 
 
 avaro somigliante salvutico fico stare 
 the topsof the mountainsand cannot be reached by honest men, 
 
 su cbgliere * 
 
 and are the food of the ravens and of the rooks. 
 _, pasto corvo - - cornacchione* 
 
168 EXERCISES. 
 
 19. He who puts off an undertaking is like the villager who, 
 differire villano 
 
 wishing to pass a river, waits till it cease to flow, and the 
 
 volere aspettareche scorra tutto, 
 
 stream runs and shall run on always. 
 cbrrere 
 
 2 i 
 
 20. What does reason demand at the (hands of) man ! 
 
 addomandare 
 
 2 3 1 
 
 a very easy thing : to live according to nature. 
 facile * * 
 
 21. Dante teaches us that the path of virtue is difficult 
 
 insegnare malegevole 
 
 at the beginning, then easy, and at last very agreeable. 
 
 nel principle, poi agevole, molto dilettevok. 
 
 22. Genius becomes enfeebled, if we do not recruit it 
 ingegno infievolisee, * * ristorare * 
 
 2 i 
 
 by (a) constant study. 
 con continue 
 
 23. We must begin to learn from infancy. 
 
 Bisogna imparare wfino da fanciullo. 
 
 24. Among all the vices, we must first resist 
 
 si conviene in prima contrastare 
 
 gluttony. 
 gola. 
 
 25. By beauty, we direct the mind to contemplation ; 
 
 * dirizzare animo 
 
 2 i 
 
 and by contemplation to the love of heavenly things : 
 
 * desidtrio del cielo 
 
 thus it (viz. beauty) is sent among us as a specimen and 
 
 onde mandare per 
 
 2 i 
 
 (as) a pledge of heavenly things. 
 
 arra * 
 
169 
 EXERCISE XIV. 
 
 ON THE ADVERBS. 
 
 1. You know now how the things go on. 
 
 Sapereora passare. 
 
 43 12 
 
 2. How powerful is the force of love ! 
 [368] poderoso sono forze 
 
 3. We purchase a favour very dearly, when we ask for 
 
 assai caro, * domandare 
 
 it even a single time (once only). 
 * pur 
 
 4. He has advised me faith fully. 
 
 consigliare fedek [349], 
 
 2 i 
 
 5. I remember and shall always remember yon, because 
 
 Ricordarsi di voi, 
 
 you deserve it. 
 valere 
 
 6. Let us begin joyfully (to) this enterprise. 
 
 Metier si lieto 
 
 7. Mad, no ; but in love, yes. 
 Pazzo, innamorato, 
 
 8. Now it is time to prove your fidelity. 
 
 * provare * fede. 
 2 i 
 
 9. It is the property of a great soul to despise deeply 
 
 prbprio grande animo * sprezzare alto 
 
 injuries and insults. 
 offesa. 
 
 10. Now is arrived the time when you can obtain his 
 
 venuto che potere avere 
 
 friendship which you have so much desired. 
 desiderare. 
 
170 EXERCISES. 
 
 11. /have rented a little villa near to this (place). 
 
 preso afitto * di qui. 
 
 12. If thou art unwilling to do me this favour, at least 
 non volere almeno 
 
 bring me a glass of water. 
 far venire 
 
 2 1 
 
 13. The "bright day being come, and the tempest being 
 
 venuto, essendosi 
 a little calmed, the woman raised her head. 
 alquanto acchetare, alzare ** 
 
 14. Since you cannot go elsewhere, I will lodge you 
 Poiche altrove albergare 
 
 willingly (for) this night. 
 
 15. He began to make an appearance of extending 
 
 Cominciare sembiante distendere 
 one of his fingers, and afterwards the hand, and then the arm. 
 appresso poi 
 
 16. I found myself exactly opposite (to) the door of the 
 
 trovare appunto dirimpetto a uscio 
 
 chamber whence the lady should come out. 
 
 donde donna dovere uscire. 
 
 17. He ran a thousand times in the day, now to the 
 
 Correre ora 
 
 window, now to the door, and now into the court (for) 
 
 corte * 
 
 to see this woman. 
 
 [252] 
 
 18. / saw you rise and seat yourself there 
 
 vedere levare porre a sedere 
 where you are. 
 dove 
 
 10. He began to look at him steadfastly. 
 Cominciare riguardare Jisso [350], 
 
ADVERBS. 171 
 
 20. When it will be agreeable to you, you can freely 
 
 a grado vi potrete libero 
 
 depart. 
 partire. 
 
 21. /shall lament in vain for having lost my youth. 
 
 Dolersi di perduta * giovanezza* 
 
 22. They began to say, who is there \ 
 
 Cominciare 
 
 23. My father, you are now old and you can 
 oggimai vecchio potere 
 
 with difficulty support fatigue. 
 male [350] durar fatica. 
 
 24. What are you doing yonder ! 
 
 laggiu? 
 
 25. 7 will tell a thing incredible, perhaps, but true. 
 
 Dire non credibile, forse, 
 
 EXERCISE XV. 
 
 ON THE CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 1. If you reach Rome, you will have no more 
 
 arriverete sino a 
 
 doubt about it. 
 ne 
 
 2. He could not deny it, even though he would. 
 
 potrebbe [372] 
 
 3. If at the beginning of an undertaking men thought (to) 
 principio 
 
 /the end they would never do anything. 
 * niente. 
 
 4. If I had known it, I should not have asked it of thee. 
 [371] * sapere domandare 
 
 L 
 
172 EXERCISES. 
 
 5. If thou art wise, thou wilt be less curious to know 
 
 saraisdvio, curioso cercare 
 
 the affairs of others. 
 
 6. If you come here, you shall be made welcome and 
 venire accarezzare 
 
 assisted by each. 
 
 7. Although she did not please me, and although she did not 
 
 # * 
 
 appear to me beautiful, I wished (to have) her, to 
 
 mi par ere [338] 
 
 enrage you. 
 
 far arrabbiare 
 
 8. If the desire (of it) came over me, / would have 
 * * m i darebbe 
 
 the courage to do it. 
 il cuore 
 
 9. My love will (not) end but with my death. 
 
 * finire se non per 
 
 10. If you go away, your mother will be very grieved at it. 
 par tire, * dolenteassai ne. 
 
 11. Although he wished i7, he would not and he could not 
 
 sapere 
 
 tell it again. 
 
 12. Since it pleases you thus, I will do it. 
 Poiche piacere 
 
 13. Thus we may conclude that every thing is submitted 
 Sicche * pub * sia suggetta 
 
 to his power. 
 * potenza. 
 
CONJUNCTIONS. 173 
 
 1 4. If thou answerest not to insults, thou wilt inflict a 
 
 rispbndere ingiuria, fare 
 2 i 
 
 mortal wound on him who has offended thee. 
 piaga a colui offeso 
 
 15. Man could not imagine that our blessedness, in con- 
 L'uomopotere immaginarsi * beatitudine,nel con- 
 templating God, will be eternal and without any suspicion of 
 templar sospetto 
 
 satiety, if he did not see that the contemplation of the charms of 
 
 sa#ea[37lt] * * dellavaghezza 
 
 2 121 
 
 virtue is an incomprehensible pleasure, an ineffable delight, 
 
 incomprensibile ineffaUlebeatitudine 
 
 an attraction which, when it ends, he would wish to begin again, 
 
 dolcezza finire, 
 
 a contentment such that man forgets himself. 
 contento se ne dimentica se medesimo. 
 
 2 i 
 
 16. How beautiful she is how charming (she is) how 
 [368] * V ag a 
 
 graceful (she is) ! 
 grazioso ! 
 
 17. Although I should love thee (not] for no other cause, 
 
 thy life is dear to me that / may live. 
 * caro acciocche 
 
 18. His comrades dared not help him ; on the contrary, they 
 
 * compagno ardire anzi, 
 
 cried out together with the others that he ought to be killed. 
 gridare fosse morto. 
 
 1 9. If you had come earlier, you could have dined withus. 
 
 a miglior or a avreste 
 
 20. To do that which you demand me, I wait only 
 Afarquetto domandare nonaspettarealtro 
 
 for time. 
 che 
 
 *)- A past tense after se, ove, quando, is also translated by the im- 
 perfect subjunctive. 
 
174 EXERCISES. 
 
 21. Sir, the cranes have (not) but one leg. 
 Siynor, gru se non gamba. 
 
 22. Certainly if I denied that, / should deny the truth. 
 Certo, * cid, negare [424] vero. 
 
 23. In order that the high-horn girl should not fall into 
 Acciocche gentil gibvane venisse a 
 
 2 i 
 
 the hands of a worthless man, we should believe that God, 
 mano vile * dee Iddio, 
 
 in his kindness, permitted that which happened. 
 per * benignita, permettesse quello avvenire. 
 
 24. If you had resisted (yourself) vigorously, all this 
 
 * opporsi vigoroso, 
 would not have happened. 
 
 avveniva. 
 
 25. Before (that) thou killest me, tell me in what I have 
 Anzi uccidere * 
 
 offended thee. 
 
 EXERCISE XVI. 
 
 ON THE USE OF THE AUXILIARY VERBS. 
 
 1. There was not a single man who did not laugh 
 [364] * ismascellasse 
 
 immoderately. 
 dalle risa. 
 
 2. Have I then to (must I) suffer all the time (days) of 
 
 [369]* stentare 
 
 my life ! 
 la 
 
 3. What is there of novelty 2 
 
AUXILIARY VERBS. 175 
 
 4. / have to speak to you about an affair of importance. 
 
 [&49~]parlare * per cosa che importa. 
 
 5. What is there ! (i. e. What is the matter ?) What do 
 
 * * 
 
 you command ? 
 commandare ? 
 
 6. These are things (this is enough) to make one mad. 
 
 * impazzare. 
 
 7. Who is there \ It is I. 
 
 * [456] 
 
 8. Are you so little employed, that you trouble yourself 
 tanto occupare, diate impdccio 
 
 with the affairs of others ? 
 delle facenda altrui ? 
 
 2 1 
 
 9. Here is a certain rural tranquillity that one finds 
 
 * * villereccio quiete 
 (we find) not in many other places. 
 * * luogo. 
 
 10. If it belonged to me, / would make him see his own 
 Se stesse [458] fare ravvedere 
 
 fault in spite of himself. 
 suo malgrado. 
 
 11. The house which, two years ago, belonged (was) to my 
 
 * * [363] di 
 
 sister, belongs (is) to me at present. 
 mia oggi. 
 
 12. I refrained from writing to you through fear of 
 
 Mi tenere per temenza 
 
 being troublesome to you. 
 essere molesto * 
 
 13. These are things to make fools believe (Fools 
 
 [450] * * dar merlotti ai ad intendere. 
 only would believe such things). 
 
176 EXERCISES. 
 
 14. In all (the) things, the mean is to be praised, and 
 mezzo * lodare, 
 
 the extremes to be blamed. 
 estremitd * biasimare. 
 
 15. Henceforth it is for me to speak, and / will do it 
 Oramai toccare [458] 
 
 willingly. 
 
 16. There are some (of them) of all shapes. 
 
 * * ne ognifatta. 
 
 1 7. You are (the) thoughtless if you have not understood 
 
 gli smemorati se inteso 
 
 it. 
 
 18. Our conversations have been too long. 
 
 * ragionamento * * lungo. 
 
 19. Now you know that which is to do (what is to be 
 Or a condscere * 
 
 done), and that which is to follow. 
 
 * seguitare. 
 
 20. These fruits are better to look at than (good) to 
 
 * riguardare 
 eat. 
 mangiare. 
 
 21. Is it you, my father, who calls me \ 
 * chiamare 
 
 22. Yes, it is I ; come down quickly. 
 SI * vien giu tosto. 
 
 23. It is for our master to reward us, and not for us 
 Toccare * * premiare * 
 
 to reward him. 
 * * 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 177 
 
 24. If I had known that it belonged to me to do it 
 Se avessi saputo toccare 
 
 2 1 
 
 I would have done it already. 
 gid. 
 
 25. Having learned to whom it belonged, / would not 
 
 udire * chi volli 
 
 accept it. 
 accettare 
 
 EXERCISE XVII. 
 
 ON THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 1. / am a merchant, and I go carrying here and there 
 
 mercante * portare di qua e di la 
 2 i 
 
 Sicilian honey and cheese. 
 Siciliano cacio. 
 
 2. Take the glass and give me something to drink. 
 Pigliare biechiere [32&]bere. 
 
 3. If you do (the) wrong, it will be for you to lament it. 
 f arete male, toccare pidngere 
 
 4. Upon my word, I wish to make him find that which he 
 
 Allafe, vbglio 
 
 is seeking. 
 andar cercando. 
 
 5. Why do you seek for that which you will perhaps 
 Perche x forse 
 
 never find \ 
 non mai trovare ? 
 
 6. All flee that which we seek to flee. 
 andar fuggendo cercare di 
 
 7. Shall we suffer that an ignorant man play the philo- 
 
 Patire noi fare filbso- 
 
 sopher \ 
 fo? 
 
178 EXERCISES. 
 
 8. It is for me to tell the last story of those of 
 Toccare raccontare novella 
 
 to-day. 
 oggi. 
 
 9. I wished to go to your house (to call on you) to wish 
 
 Vokre * da voi a dar- 
 
 you a pleasant journey, but it was not possible. 
 vi il buon 
 
 10. Shall we stay here without doing any thing ! 
 
 Stare niente? 
 
 11. There are already eight years that / give him his 
 
 ** _ _ _ da 
 food. (/ have already supported him eight years), 
 mangiare. 
 
 12. He goes looking for his friend. 
 
 * 
 
 13. / promise you to go and see you in three or four 
 
 promettere * [446] * fra 
 days. 
 
 14. Give me something to buy the dinner. 
 
 comprare 
 
 15. What shall we do at supper if our friends come ! 
 
 da cena se gli vengono ? 
 
 16. / shall not be able to call on you, but I shall call, 
 
 potrb venire da * andare 
 without fail, on your brother. 
 senza fallo y da 
 
 17. /was going to your house to ask (to you) dinner 
 
 * * per da desinare. 
 (from you). 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 179 
 
 18. He was walking through the fields gathering some 
 
 per campo cbgliere 
 
 fragrant plants, and found this pretty little jewel. 
 odortfere trovare (-two) gioiello. 
 
 19. Since you have done that which I (had) told you, / 
 Poiche detto 
 
 will give you something to buy you a pretty gown. 
 da vcste. 
 
 20. I wish to go and spend some weeks at my little 
 Volere a fare * (-etta) 
 
 country house. 
 villa. 
 
 21. Irresolute of him-self, he went wandering here and there 
 Incerto se medesimo, vagare or qua or Id 
 
 through Tuscany. 
 per Toscana. 
 
 22. What shall I go seeking through the world \ That 
 
 cercare [339] lo Quel 
 
 which / love and that which / desire is with me. 
 
 desiderare meco. 
 
 23. Some go here, and others there, fleeing that which we 
 Chi * qua, - /a, fuggire 
 
 desire to flee. 
 cercare di 
 
 24. / shall go and dine with you and with your party. 
 
 a desinar * compagnia. 
 
 25. He went dancing and singing so gaily, (that he almost 
 
 > saltare tanto lieto, 
 jumped out of his sldn) that he could not contain himself 
 
 capere 
 in his skin. 
 il cuoio. 
 
180 
 EXERCISE XVIII. 
 
 ON THE PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 
 
 1. He thinks to have caused (in) me great fear in telling 
 
 Credere fare 
 
 me that he would not let me enter his house. 
 * in cam sua. 
 
 2. Men err in speaking in many different ways. 
 
 ' peccare * * in modo. 
 
 3. She said then almost laughing You are too cruel with 
 
 Dire quasi ridere 
 me. 
 
 4. Oiten, in looking for one thing, we find another (of them) 
 
 * cercare * 
 which is not less valuable. 
 caro. 
 
 5. He gave force to his words hy weeping, (by) crying, 
 
 Aiutare le * piangere, gridare, 
 
 2 3 1 
 
 and (by) striking his breast and his face with his hands. 
 darsi nel petto e nel viso delle mani. 
 
 6. Plato, in exhorting Diony sius to remember some of his 
 Platone * esortare Dioriisio ricordarsi 
 
 precepts, told him, in one of his letters, that the best way 
 
 disse modo 
 
 of calling them to mind was not to write them. 
 rammentarsi 
 
 7. Cicero, seeing that his brother, who was small of 
 Cicerone, vedere * piccolo di 
 
 stature, had girded on a long sword, said : who has tied my 
 
 statura, cinto 
 
 brother to that sword I 
 
PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 181 
 
 8. In coming before me the first time, he acted the deaf 
 Nelvenirmi dinanzi fece 
 
 and the fool. 
 smemorato. 
 
 9. There will be no one, who in seeing us, will not make 
 
 * # 
 
 way, and (will not) let us pass. 
 luogo, andare. 
 
 10. Here, in this gentle current of air, we shall spend this 
 Qui, a ventolino passare 
 
 hot part of the day more agreeably than in walking 
 caldaparte piacevole * passeggiare 
 
 through the garden. 
 per 
 
 11. I never have so much pleasure' as / have in praising 
 * ho * lodare 
 
 the ladies. 
 donna. 
 
 12. Pardon me, if / vex you sometimes by asking 
 
 vi tolgo il capo * domandare 
 
 you questions. 
 
 13. / despaired on seeing myself watched by those who 
 
 disperarsi * guardare * 
 were near to us. 
 intorno a 
 
 14. In looking around he saw nothing, but clouds and 
 * guardare dattorno [375] nuvolo 
 
 2 i 
 
 15. Judging to have seen enough, he proposed to return 
 
 Parendogli proporre tornare 
 to Paris. 
 
182 EXERCISES. 
 
 16. The good woman, hearing that, had pity on him. 
 
 _ udire gliene venne pietd. 
 
 17. / wish thee to wait for me a year without remarrying, 
 _[447] [444] 
 
 beginning from this day when 7 set out. 
 cominciare * che mi parto. 
 
 18. He hoped for pardon by making presents to the 
 
 * Sperare [473] donare 
 
 most influential people, 
 piu grosso. 
 
 19. Do not make a show of being astonished, nor lose 
 * vista maravigliare, ne perder 
 
 time in denying it. 
 tempo * 
 
 20. After supper they amused themselves in singing and 
 Dopo cena trastullare [473] cantare 
 
 in dancing in the usual manner. 
 * ballare a usato modo. 
 
 21. These doing one thing, and those another, the time 
 Chi fare * 
 
 passing away, the hour of supper, scarcely expected, 
 fuggirsi, or a appena aspettare, 
 arrived. 
 soppravenire* 
 
 22. Become all red with shame, almost weeping, and 
 
 Divenire vermtgliodi vergogna, quasi piangere, 
 
 2 i 
 
 trembling all over, in broken words, she began to express 
 tremante conparola rotto, cominciare dire 
 herself thus. 
 
 23. The young girl, weeping, answered that she had lost 
 
 giovane, * rispondere smarrita 
 her companions in the forest. 
 * compagnia selva. 
 
PAST PARTICIPLE. 183 
 
 24. He consumed, in looking for them, all the rest 
 
 Consumare, * cercare rimanente 
 
 of that morning. 
 mattina. 
 
 25. Thou injurest me, in thinking perhaps to serve me. 
 
 offendere [445] credere forse giovare 
 
 EXERCISE XIX. 
 
 ON THE PAST PARTICIPLE. 
 
 1. Having given me luncheon, dinner, and supper, he lodged 
 
 [441] da merendare 9 
 me like a prince. 
 
 2 i 
 
 2. Seeing the lonely place, they robbed him. 
 Vedere rubare 
 
 3. All the places around were covered with bones. 
 d'intorno coperto [296] ossame. 
 
 4. Each star has already disappeared from the east. 
 
 era fuggire 
 
 5. This noble lady having departed from this world, all 
 
 gentil donna diparfitasi 
 the city remained almost bereaved and despoiled of all its 
 
 - rimanere vedovo spogliare * 
 
 nobility. 
 
 6. When you shall have read, and re-read this letter, 
 
 burn it. 
 bruciare 
 
184 EXERCISES. 
 
 7. He who has betrayed his benefactor, can do that which 
 
 tradire il pub 
 
 he desires without feeling the least remorse. 
 
 vuole [444] averne minima 
 
 8. / am ashamed of it, even to my soul. 
 
 sono arrossito * sino neW 
 
 9. The answer which you have sent me by my brother, 
 
 mandare 
 
 has not yet arrived. s 
 
 e comparire [438], 
 
 10. He wishes to die as he has lived. 
 
 - e vivuto. 
 
 11. She had so much grace in smiling, that if she had 
 
 * ridere, avesse 
 
 always smiled, she would have always pleased. 
 sarebbe piaciuta. 
 
 12. She began to say the words given her by the scholar. 
 
 13. She had remained a long time in Sicily with the father 
 
 Era dimorare 
 
 of this young man. 
 gibvane. 
 
 14. Let not the men be vexed, we (women) are 
 
 nan V abbiano per male, 
 
 more compassionate than they. 
 pietoso 
 
 15. The women having got to the window, began to cry, 
 
 thieves ! thieves ! 
 alladro! alladro! 
 
 16. The affection of his son inthralled him so, that he 
 affezione il strinse tanto, < 
 
 paid no attention to the trick played by his servant. 
 pose mente ingannofare * il servo. 
 
PAST PARTICIPLE. 185 
 
 17. If it had pleased (to the) God, death would have been 
 
 fossepiacere era 
 more agreeahle to me than to live longer. 
 
 - a grado * piu vivere. 
 
 18. The nurses of the infants tell them when they weep 
 
 bdlia fanciutto 
 
 there is King Richard, because he was feared like death. 
 perciocche temere 
 
 19. When they had heard this, there was no need of any 
 Come bisognb piu 
 
 thing else. 
 avanti. 
 
 20. My father, I do not believe it necessary that I tell 
 Padre mio, [4471 bisognare racoon- 
 
 you the history of my misfortune, for I am sure that you 
 tare istbria * sciagura, che certa 
 have heard it. 
 
 udire 
 
 21. My eyes, deprived of their mirth, gave to my heart 
 Gli privare * allegrezza, dare * cuore 
 
 a sad subject of lamentation. 
 noioso cagione dolersi. 
 
 22. They were all crowned with oak-leaves. 
 Esso inghirlandare fronde di quercia. 
 
 23. I am certain that they are come as far as this 
 certo venire infino a questo luogo 
 
 without meeting with any opposition. 
 trovare alcuno resistenza. 
 
 24. Having saluted them with a smiling countenance, she 
 
 Salutare viso tteto, 
 
 made known to them their engagement. 
 fe manifesto, * disposizione. 
 
 25. The Virtues having departed from below (this earth}, 
 
 dipartirsi di quaggiu 
 have left wretched mortals in the dregs of the vices. 
 
 abbandonati vivente feccia vizio. 
 
186 EXERCISES. 
 
 26. A great part of the night being already past, all 
 
 Buonapezza notte gid passare, - 
 went to rest. 
 a riposarsi. 
 
 EXERCISE XX. 
 
 ON THE MOODS. 
 
 1. He trembled like a leaf, and knew not where he was. 
 
 Tremare verga, [447] dove 
 
 2. 7 think that it is necessary to write to him all that 
 
 Giudicare * quelche 
 
 passes. 
 
 3. Weep not, my child, and be quiet. 
 [387] sta zittino. 
 
 4. 7 have sent to him to say, by my servant, that he 
 
 mandare * la serva, 
 should come andt speak to me about a business of importance. 
 per cosa cheimporta. 
 2 
 
 5. I have just received a letter that I expected six months 
 
 aspettare 
 
 1 
 
 ago. 
 da. 
 
 6. Listen to me 7 am going to tell you frankly what 7 
 Udire [451] * franco 
 
 think of you. 
 
 7. 7 think that thou art in love. 
 
 [491] * innamorato. 
 
 J- When and between two verbs means in order to, it is translated 
 by a, and the second verb is always in the infinitive. 
 
MOODS. 187 
 
 8. God grant that this be so. 
 
 volere 
 
 9. / do not wish that this may frighten you (this to 
 
 spaventare 
 frighten you). 
 
 10. / think that the best way to recruit yourself is to 
 
 migliormodo riavere * 
 live in the country. 
 villa. 
 
 11. /do not know where he is going. 
 
 dove 
 
 12. Do not make a show of being astonished, and lose no 
 
 [387] vista maravigliarsi, 
 words in denying this act. 
 le negare il fatto. 
 
 13. If there is any thing in this life which calms the mind, 
 
 amid the troubles and storms of this world, / think that 
 
 angoscia - 
 
 it is study. 
 
 
 
 14. It appears to me that those who remove friendship 
 
 parere tdgliere 
 
 2 i 
 
 from this life, remove the sun from the world. 
 * * * 
 
 15. When she saw that he was gone, she began to think 
 Come vide 
 
 what she ought to do. 
 
 # 
 
 16. After that, having conducted the noblemen to the 
 Appresso menare in 
 
 garden, she asked them politely who they were. 
 * cortese fossero. 
 
 M 
 
188 , EXERCISES. 
 
 17. It appears to me that they have good reason. 
 
 * molta ragione. 
 
 2 1 
 
 18. She avoids me as if I were some strange thing. 
 
 fuggire * qualche strano 
 
 19. Attend well to what I am going to tell you. 
 Attenclere bene [451]. 
 
 20. Fear not that you will ever be blamed for this. 
 Dubitar di questo ti seguire mai biasimo. 
 
 21. /do not know what wrong it would be to do it. 
 
 sapere che mat si * fare 
 
 22. We should be very contented that you went to pass 
 
 ci contenteremmo molto andare a stare 
 some time in Paris. 
 nlquanto a 
 
 23. 1 desired very much for many days to know who 
 desiderare sommo piu giorno saper chi 
 
 he was. 
 
 24. I pray (you) that you may not be so foolish as 
 pregare voi non smte sdocco che 
 
 to wish to expose yourself to so great danger. 
 vogliale voi sottopporre si grave per\colo. 
 
 25. Not to lose time, / wish to go and begin. 
 [338] perdcr tempo, volere andare cominciare* 
 
189 
 
 THE INTERJECTIONS. 
 
 All! ah! | 
 
 Ahi ! oh ! > expression of pain, misfortune, of horror. 
 
 Ahime ! alas ! J 
 
 Deh! ah! entreat in gly. 
 
 Eh ! eh ! complaint or inquiry. 
 
 Oh ! or Oh, oh ! of surprise and astonishment. 
 
 Oi! orOhi! oh! of pain and suffering. 
 
 Oibb ! fie ! contempt or disapproval. 
 
 Oime ! ohime ! alas ! of one in pain, &c. 
 
 Buono ! good ! in approval. 
 
 Bravo ! brava ! approval. The Italians employ the word 
 as an adjective, and say of a man, bravo, bravissimo; of a 
 woman brava, bravissima. The English use bravo indis- 
 criminately. 
 
 Guai ! wo is me ! 
 
 Old ! holla ! hark ye ! 
 
 Su ! up ! get up ! 
 
 Orsu ! come ! 
 
 Via I begone ! 
 
 Animo! cheer up ! 
 
 Zitto! hist ! silence ! used as an adjective. 
 
 Printed by Oliver & Boyd, 
 Tweeddale Court, High Street, Edinburgh, 
 
EXHIBITION MEDAL LIST. 
 
 EDUCATIONAL WOKKS 
 
 PUBLISHED BY 
 
 OLIVER AND BOYD, EDINBURGH; 
 
 SIMPKIN, MARSHALL, AND CO., LONDON. 
 
 This List is confined to the Works exhibited by Oliver and 
 Boyd, for the merit of which a Medal has been awarded by 
 Her Majesty's Commissioners of the International Exhibition 
 of 1862. 
 
 ENGLISH READING, GRAMMAR, ETC. *. d. 
 
 CONNON'S System of English Grammar 2 6 
 
 DEMAUS' Selections from Paradise Lost, with Notes 1 6 
 
 Analysis of Sentences Reduced to 3 
 
 Ewmo's Principles of Elocution, improved by Calvert 3 6 
 
 FULTON'S Edition of Johnson's Dictionary 1 6 
 
 LENNIE'S Child's A, B, C, Part I. l^d. Part II 3 
 
 Child's Ladder 10 
 
 Principles of English Grammar [The Key, 3s. 6d.] 1 6 
 
 M'CuLLOCH's First Reading-Book 1J 
 
 Second Reading-Book 3 
 
 Third Reading-Book 10 
 
 Fourth Reading-Book & Synopsis of Spelling 1 6 
 
 Series of Lessons in Prose and Verse 2 
 
 Course of Reading in Science and Literature 3 
 
 Manual of English Grammar 1 6 
 
 Prefixes and Affixes of the English Language 2 
 
 MILLEN'S Initiatory English Grammar 1 
 
 REID'S Rudiments of English Grammar 6 
 
 Rudiments of English Composition [The Key, 3s. 6d.] 2 
 
 Pronouncing Dictionary of the English Language 6 6 
 
 SESSIONAL SCHOOL Etymological Guide 2 6 
 
 Old Testament Biography 6 
 
 New Testament Biography 6 
 
 SPALDING'S (Professor) History of English Literature 3 6 
 
 WHITE'S System of English Grammar 1 6 
 
 MATHEMATICS, NATURAL PHILOSOPHY, ETC. 
 
 INGRAM'S Mathematics, by Trotter [The Key, 3s. 6d.], reduced to... 4 6 
 
 Mensuration, by Trotter 2 
 
 INGRAM & TROTTER'S Euclid's Plane Geometry and Trigonometry. 1 6 
 
 LEES' Catechism of Natural Philosophy, Parts I. & II., each 9 
 
 NICOL'S Introductory Book of the Sciences 1 6 
 
Oliver and Boyd's Exhibition Medal List, 
 
 GEOGRAPHY AND ASTRONOMY. *. d> 
 
 EDINBURGH ACADEMY Modern Geography, improved 2 6 
 
 EWING'S Geography, with Astronomy and Physical Geography 4 6 
 
 with 14 Maps 6 
 
 MURPHY'S Bible Atlas, 24 Maps, coloured, with Hist. Descriptions 1 6 
 
 REID'S Rudiments of Modern Geography (Map), Is. ; with 5 Maps.. 1 3 
 
 Abridgment of Ditto 6 
 
 Outlines of Sacred Geography, with Map of Palestine 6 
 
 Introductory Atlas of Mod. Geography, 10 Maps, revised... 2 6 
 
 School Atlas of Modern Geography, 16 Maps, revised. 5 
 
 REID'S (Hugo) Elements of Astronomy 3 
 
 Physical Geography, with Astronomy (Phys. Chart). 1 
 
 STEWART'S Modern Geography, with Physical Geog. & Astronomy. 3 6 
 
 WHITE'S Abstract of General Geography, Is.; with 4 Maps 1 3 
 
 System of Modern Geography, 2s. 6d.; with 4 Maps 2 9 
 
 HISTORY. 
 
 SIMPSON'S History of Scotland, with Map 3 6 
 
 Goldsmith's History of England, with Map 3 6 
 
 Goldsmith's Rome, with Map 3 6 
 
 Goldsmith's Greece, with Map 3 6 
 
 TYTLER'S Elements of General History, continued to 1862, with 
 
 2 Maps, Frontispiece, etc 3 6 
 
 WATTS' Scripture History, with Notice by Dr Tweedie 2 
 
 WHITE'S History of England for Junior Classes 1 6 
 
 History of Scotland for Junior Classes 1 6 
 
 History of Scotland for Senior Classes 3 6 
 
 History of Great Britain and Ireland, continued to 1862, 
 
 with Map, reduced to 3 
 
 History of France, with Map 3 6 
 
 Sacred History 1 6 
 
 Outlines of the History of Rome 1 6 
 
 Outlines of Universal History 2 
 
 Elements of Universal History, continued to 1862, 7s.; or 
 
 in 3 Parts, each 2 6 
 
 WRITING, ARITHMETIC, AND BOOK-KEEPING. 
 
 HUTTON'S Arithmetic & Book-Keeping, by S. & D. Entry, by Trotter 2 6 
 
 Book-keeping, by S. & D. Entry, by Trotter, separately 2 
 
 Two Ruled Writing Books for Ditto: Single Entry 1 6 
 
 Double Entry 1 6 
 
 INGRAM'S Principles of Arithmetic, Improved Edition [Key, 2s. 6d.] 1 
 MELROSE'S Arithmetic, by Ingram and Trotter [The Key, 3s. 6d.]... 1 6 
 SCOTT'S Writing Copy Books, with Engraved Headings, in a progres- 
 sive Series of 20 numbers: Post Paper each 4 
 
 Copy Lines, 30 Sorts each 4 
 
Oliver and Boyd's Exhibition Medal List, 
 
 Writing, Arithmetic, and Boo'a-keeping continued. 5. d. 
 
 SMITH'S Practical Arithmetic for Junior Classes [Answers, 6d.] 6 
 
 Practical Arithmetic for Senior Classes [Answers, 6d.] 2 
 
 STEWART'S First Lessons in Arithmetic [Answers, 6d.] 6 
 
 Practical Arithmetic [The Key, 3s. 6d.] 1 6 
 
 TROTTER'S Arithmetic for Junior Classes [The Key, 6d.] 6 
 
 Arithmetic for Advanced Classes [The Key, 6d.] 6 
 
 Complete System of Arithmetic [The Key, 4s. 6d.] 3 
 
 LATIN AND GREEK. 
 
 CICERO'S Orationes Selectae, by Professor Ferguson 1 6 
 
 Cato Major, Laelius, &c., by Professor Ferguson 1 6 
 
 De Offlciis, by Professor Ferguson 1 6 
 
 DYMOCK'S Sallust, with Notes, and Index, reduced to 2 
 
 Caesar, with Notes, Index, and Map of Gaul 4 
 
 EDINBURGH ACADEMY CLASS-BOOKS: 
 
 Rudiments of the Latin Language 2 
 
 Latin Delectus, with Vocabulary 3 
 
 Rudiments of the Greek Language 3 6 
 
 Greek Extracts, with Vocabulary and Index 3 6 
 
 Ciceronis Opera Selecta, published at 4s. 6d., reduced to 3 
 
 FERGUSON'S (Professor) Grammatical Exercises, with Notes and 
 
 Vocabulary [The Key, 2s.] 2 
 
 Introductory Latin Delectus, with Vocabulary 2 
 
 Ovid's Metamorphoses, with Notes and Index 2 6 
 
 GREEK GRAMMATICAL EXERCISES, with Vocabulary, by J.Fergusson, 
 
 M.D. [The Key, 3s. 6d.] 3 6 
 
 GREEK TESTAMENT, Griesbach's Readings, by Duncan, reduced to.. 3 6 
 
 HOMER'S ILIAD, by Veitch, from Bekker's Text, & Index, reduced.. 3 6 
 
 Books I., VI., XX., and XXIV., with a copious 
 
 Vocabulary, by J. Fergusson, M.D 3 6 
 
 HUNTER'S Ruddiman's Latin Rudiments 1 6 
 
 Sallust, with Notes, reduced to 1 6 
 
 Virgil, with Critical Notes, reduced to 2 6 
 
 Horace, with various Readings, reduced to 2 
 
 Livy's History, Books XXI. to XXV., with Notes 4 
 
 M'DOWALL'S Caesar, with Vocabulary, Notes, Map, and Memoir.... 3 
 
 MACGO WAN'S First Latin Lessons, by Dr Halle, with Vocabulary.. 2 
 
 Second Latin Lessons, with Vocabulary 3 
 
 MAIR'S Introduction to Latin Syntax, by Stewart, with Vocabulary 3 
 NEILSOX'S Eutropius and Aurelius Victor, with Vocabulary, etc.... 2 
 STEWART'S Cornelius Nepos, with Notes, Index, and Vocabulary... 3 
 XENOPHON'S Anabasis, Books I. and II., with a copious Vocabu- 
 lary, by James Fergusson, M.D 2 6 
 
 OLYMPUS AND ITS INHABITANTS : a Narrative Sketch of the Classical 
 Mythology, by Agnes Smith. Edited by J. Carmichael, M.A.... 3 6 
 
Oliver and Boyd's Exhibition Medal List, 
 
 FRENCH AND ITALIAN. *. d. 
 
 CARON'S First French Class Book [The Key, Is.] 1 
 
 First French Reading-Book, with Vocabulary 1 
 
 French Grammar, with Exercises [The Key, 2s.] 2 
 
 CHAMBAUD'S Fables Choisies, by Scot & Wells^yith Vocabulary... 2 
 
 FRENCH TESTAMENT, Ostervald's Protestant Version 1 6 
 
 GIBSON'S Le Petit Fablier, with copious Vocabulary 1 6 
 
 HALLARD'S French Grammar, with Exercises [The Key, 4s.] 4 
 
 RAMPINI'S Italian Grammar (Italian and English} [The Key, 2s.].... 3 6 
 
 SuRENNE'sNew French Dialogues 2 
 
 French Manual and Traveller's Companion 3 6 
 
 French and English Dictionary, Cheaper Edition 3 6 
 
 Pronouncing French and English Dictionary, New 
 
 Edition, revised and reduced in price 7 6 
 
 Fenelon's Telemaque, 2 vols, each Is.; or bound together 2 6 
 
 ...., Moliere's L'Avare, stiff wrapper (bound, Is. 6d.) 1 
 
 Moliere's Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme (bound, Is. 6d.)... 1 
 
 Moliere's Le Misanthrope and Le Mariage Force, 1 vol. 
 
 stiff wrapper (bound, Is. 6d.) 1 
 
 Voltaire's Histoirede Charles XII, printed cover (bd. 1/6) 1 
 
 Voltaire's Russie sous Pierre le Grand, 2 vols, stiff wrap- 
 per, each Is.; or bound together 2 6 
 
 Voltaire's La Henriade, printed cover (bound, Is. 6d.)... 1 
 
 SYNOPTICAL TABLES of the French Language 1 6 
 
 New Works since the award of the Medal. 
 
 GRAHAM'S Genealogical and Historical Diagrams 4 6 
 
 M'DOWALL'S Virgil: with Vocabulary, Notes, and Memoir 3 
 
 LESSONS from Dr M'Culloch's First Reading-Book, large type, for 
 
 hanging on the wall, 10 sheets, Is. ; or mounted on Roller 1 8 
 
 KEY to Smith's Practical Arithmetic for Senior Classes 4 
 
 MASSIE'S Latin Prose Composition: The Construction of Clauses, 
 with Illustrations from Cicero and Ca3sar. With Vocabulary and 
 
 Index Verborum. Now ready 3 6 
 
 SWING'S General Atlas of Modern Geography, 29 Maps, revised.... 7 6 
 
 WHITE'S School Atlas of Modern Geography, 24 Maps, revised 6 
 
 Elementary Atlas of Modern Geography, 10 Maps, revised 2 6 
 
 The following are also now published by Oliver and Boyd: 
 
 CHRISTISON'S Easy Grammar of the French Language [Key, 8d.]... 1 4 
 
 Recueil cle Fables et Contes Choises, with Vocabulary 1 4 
 
 Fleury's Histoire de France, with Translations of the 
 
 more difficult and idiomatic passages 2 6 
 
 MELVILLE'S Lectiones Selectee, for Beginners ; with Vocabulary... 1 6 
 
 RAE'S First Lessons in English Grammar 6 
 
 *** A detailed Catalogue will le forwarded POST FREE on application 
 to Oliver and Boyd ; and a specimen copy of any Book will likewise be sent 
 POST FREE on receipt of the retail price in postage stamps. 
 
14 DAY USE 
 
 RETURN TO DESK FROM WHICH BORROWED 
 
 LOAN DEPT. 
 
 This book is due on the last date stamped below, or 
 
 on the date to which renewed. 
 Renewed books are subject to immediate recall. 
 
 
 MA 
 
 
NEW EDITIONS. 
 
 FRENCH READING INSTRUCTOR. By G. 
 
 SURENNE, Author of "Pronouncing French and English 
 
 Dictionary." 5th Edit., Reduced to 2s. 6d. 399 pages. 
 
 %* This forms a complete course of French Reading in Prose 
 
 and Poetry, from easy lessons to those adapted for advanced 
 
 pupils. With Vocabulary to the early lessons, Historical and 
 
 Geographical Vocabulary, and a Key to French Pronunciation. 
 
 HOW TO TRAIN YOUNG EYES and EARS, 
 
 A Manual of Object Lessons for Parents and Teachers. 
 By MARY ANN Ross, Mistress of the Church of Scot- 
 land Normal Infant School, Edinburgh. Is. 6d. 
 The Museum. " The lessons are arranged with great clear- 
 ness, and are worked out in their details with a skill which 
 shows the mind and hand of an experienced teacher." 
 
 Home and Colonial Society's Educational Paper. " Full of 
 well-chosen and varied matter." 
 
 GRAMMATICAL EXERCISES ON THE 
 MOODS, TENSES, AND SYNTAX OF ATTIC 
 GREEK. With a Vocabulary containing the meaning 
 of every Word in the Text. 3d Edition. On the plan 
 of Professor Ferguson's Latin " Grammatical Exer- 
 cises." By Dr FERGUSSON. 12mo, 3s. 6d. 
 %* This work is intended to follow the Greek Rudiments. 
 
 PUPIL'S DAILY REGISTER OF MARKS. 
 
 Space for 52 Weeks. 2d. Constructed so as to furnish 
 information required by Government. 
 
 SCHOOL REGISTER OF ATTENDANCE, 
 
 ABSENCE, AND FEES. Arranged on a New and 
 Improved Plan, and adapted to the provisions of the 
 Revised Code, by MORRIS F. MYRON, Parochial School- 
 master of Clyne. Intended for use in Boys', Girls', 
 or Mixed Schools. Second Edition*, improved. Is. 
 Each folio will serve 50 pupils for a Quarter. 
 
 Edinburgh : OLIVER AND BOY">. 
 London : SIMPKIN, MARSHALL, AND Co. 
 
QHTTAAT. A -Km 
 
 . o 
 
 1 m 
 
 jo 
 
 JO 
 
 CO 
 
 Well that Ends Well". 
 
 4. Merchant of Venice. Two 
 Gentlemen of Verona. Comedy 
 of Errors. Timon of Athens. 
 GULLIVER'S TRAVELS. 8d.; or in 2 Parts, 4d. each, viz.:- 
 
 1. Travels in Lilliput. | 2. Travels in Brobdingnag. 
 
 Twelfth Night. 
 
 2. A Midsummer Night's 
 Dream. A Winter's Tale. 
 King Lear. Hamlet.